Home

Netgear 802.11g User's Manual

Contents

1. lt DATES lt TIME gt lt PKT_TYPE gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_PORT lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_IP gt lt DST_PORT gt lt DST_PORT gt lt ACTION gt lt DESCRIPTION gt lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt PKT_TYPE gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_IP gt lt DST_INF gt lt ACTION gt lt DESCRIPTION gt Fri 2003 12 05 21 22 07 TCP Packet Source 172 31 12 156 54611 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 134 LAN Drop FIN Scan Fri 2003 12 05 21 22 38 TCP Packet Source 172 31 12 156 59937 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 670 LAN Drop Nmap Xmas Scan Fri 2003 12 05 21 23 06 TCP Packet Source 172 31 12 156 39860 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 18000 LAN Drop Null Scan Fri 2003 12 05 20327255 TCP Packet Source 172 31 12 156 38009 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 15220 LAN Drop Full Sapu Scan Fri 2003 12 05 21 28 56 TCP Packet Source 172 31 12 156 35128 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 38728 LAN Drop Full Xmas Scan Fri 2003 12 05 21 30 30 IP Packet Source 227 113 223 77 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 LAN Drop Fragment Attack Fri 2003 12 05 21 30 30 IP Packet Source 20 97 173 18 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 LAN Drop Targa3 Attack Fri 2003 12 05 21 30 30 TCP Packet Source 3 130 176 84 37860 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 63881 LAN Drop Vecna Scan Fri 2003 12 05 21 30 31 ICMP Packet Type 238 Source 100 110 182
2. Remote IP Select Start IP address Finish IP address Subnet Mask AH Configuration SPI Incoming Hex 3 8 Characters SPI Outgoing Hex 3 8 Characters C Enable Authentication Authentication Algorithm MD5 sv Key In Key Out MDS 16 chars SHA 1 20 chars ESP Configuration SPI Incoming Hex 3 8 Characters SPI Outgoing Hex 3 8 Characters CI Enable Encryption Encryption Algorithm Key In Key Out DES 8 chars 3DES 24 chars C Enable Authentication Authentication Algorithm MD5 Key In Key Out MDS 16 chars SHA 1 20 chars CI NETBIOS Enable Cancel Figure 8 4 VPN Manual Policy Menu 8 10 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The VPN Manual Policy fields are defined in the following table Table 8 1 VPN Manual Policy Configuration Fields Field Description General These settings identify this policy and determine its major characteristics Policy Name The name of the VPN policy Each policy should have a unique policy name This name is not supplied to the remote VPN Endpoint It is used to help you identify VPN polici
3. 192 1680 10 64 3 3 201 lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt PKT_TYPE gt lt SRC_IP gt lt DST_IP gt lt ACTION gt Fri 2003 12 05 22 31 27 ICMP Packet Echo Request Sourc Destination 192 168 0 1 Receive Wed 2003 07 30 16 34 56 ICMP Packet Type 238 Source Destination 192 168 0 3 Drop Fri 2003 12 05 22 59 56 ICMP Packet Echo Request Sourc Destination 192 168 0 1 Receive The format is lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EV ENT gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_PORT gt lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_IP gt lt DST_POR T gt lt DST_INF gt lt AC ION gt Wed 2003 07 30 16 24 23 UDP Packet Source Destination 10 10 10 4 1234 LAN Drop Wed 2003 07 30 17 48 09 TCP Packet SYN Source Destination 10 10 10 4 1765 LAN Receive Fri 2003 12 05 22 07 11 IP Packet Type Field 8 from 20 172 31 12 157 Drop otes ACTION Drop Receive EVENT ICMP Packet UDP Packet TCP Packet IP Packet DoS Attack Scan 192r 1630 10 207 46 130 100 WAN 64 3 3 201 65534 WAN ic br ates i 5 i k tTO Common attacks and scans are logged D 4 201 10301 02 May 2005 Firewall Log Formats Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The format is
4. DST_INF LAN DESCRIPTION Inbound rule match Inbound Default rule match PKT_TYPE UDP packet TCP connection ICMP packet Inbound Log Incoming packets that match the Firewall rules are logged The format is lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt PKT_TYPE gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_IP gt lt DST_INF gt lt ACTION gt lt DESCRIPTION gt T Fri 2003 12 05 22 59 56 ICMP Packet Echo Request Source 192 168 0 10 LAN Destination 192 168 0 1 WAN Forward Outbound Default rule match Fri 2003 12 05 23 00 58 ICMP Packet Echo Request Source 192 168 0 10 LAN Destination 172 31 12 200 WAN Forward Outbound Default rule match Fri 2003 12 05 23 02 30 TCP Packet Source 192 168 0 10 34 2 LAN Destination 216 239 39 99 80 HTTP WAN Forward Outbound Default rule match Notes SRC_INF LAN DST_INF WAN DESCRIPTION Outbound rule match Outbound Default rule match PKT_TYPE UDP packet TCP connection ICMP packet Other IP Traffic Some special packets matching the Firewall rules like VPN connection etc are logged D 2 Firewall Log Formats 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The format is lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt PKT_TYPE gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_PORT gt lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_IP gt
5. 2 4 Introduction 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Extensive Protocol Support The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server supports the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP and Routing Information Protocol RIP e The ability to enable or disable IP address sharing by NAT The FWG114P v2 allows several networked PCs to share an Internet account using only a single IP address which may be statically or dynamically assigned by your Internet service provider ISP This technique known as NAT allows the use of an inexpensive single user ISP account This feature can also be turned off completely for using the FWG114P v2 in settings where you want to manage the IP address scheme of your organization e Automatic configuration of attached PCs by DHCP The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server dynamically assigns network configuration information including IP gateway and domain name server DNS addresses to attached PCs on the LAN using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP This feature greatly simplifies configuration of PCs on your local network e DNS Proxy When DHCP is enabled and no DNS addresses are specified the router provides its own address as a DNS server to the attached PCs The router obtains actual DNS addresses from the ISP during connection setup and forwards DNS requests from the LAN e PPP
6. Field Description Serial Up Time The time elapsed since this port acquired the link Poll Interval Specifies the intervals at which the statistics are updated in this window Click on Stop to freeze the display WAN Status action buttons are described in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Connection Status action buttons Field Description Set Interval Enter a time and click the button to set the polling frequency Stop Click the Stop button to freeze the polling information Viewing a List of Attached Devices The Attached Devices menu contains a table of all IP devices that the router has discovered on the local network From the Main Menu of the browser interface under the Maintenance heading select Attached Devices to view the table shown below Attached Devices DHCP Addresses IP Address Device Name MAC Address 1 192 168 0 2 ALSALLETTE KP2 00 d0 59 d8 10 20 Figure 9 4 Attached Devices menu For each device the table shows the IP address Device Name if available and Ethernet MAC address Note that if the router is rebooted the table data is lost until the router rediscovers the devices To force the router to look for attached devices click the Refresh button 9 6 Maintenance 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Upgrading the Router Software The routing software of the FWG114P v2
7. Setup has finished installing NETGEAR ProSafe Firewall Router on your computer Set up the Netgear printer port driver a Click Finish when the Installation Wizard is done Click Finish to complete Setup C The Printer Port Setup utility displays Netgear Printer Port Installation Wizard and queries the network to locate the print server in the FWG114P v2 Note Under Windows 95 you may receive an error message stating that After a short delay the Printer Port SETUPAPI DLL was not found In this Setup utility will display the port it finds case you should upgrade your Internet in the FWG114P v2 print server Explorer to version 5 or later b Click Add to add this printer port to your computer Compatible Devices Refresh BP warp ort 1 Unknown Printer Model The Printer Port Setup utility will report that Port FWG114P_P1 has been added to the computer c Click Exit to exit the Printer Port Setup utility Indicates Port is already installed Select a Port click Add to install this printer The Windows Add Printer Wizard automatically runs Netgear Printer Port Setup Utility Print Server 7 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Identify the printer connected to the FWG114P v2 USB printer port a From the Add Printer Wizard screen selection lists find the manufacturer and model of t
8. Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 9 10 Maintenance 201 10301 02 May 2005 Chapter 10 Advanced Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the advanced features of your ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 These features can be found under the Advanced heading in the Main Menu of the browser interface Using the WAN Setup Options The first feature category under the Advanced heading is WAN Setup This menu allows configuration of a DMZ server MTU size port speed and so on From the Main Menu of the browser interface under Advanced click on WAN IP Setup to view the WAN IP Setup menu shown below WAN Setup CI Connect Automatically as Required C Default DMZ Server 192 a 10 Oo Respond to Ping on Internet Port MTU Size in bytes 1500 Port Speed AutoSense v Figure 10 1 WAN Setup Menu The WAN Setup options let you configure a DMZ server change the MTU size and set the WAN port speed These options are discussed below e Connect Automatically as Required Advanced Configuration 10 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Normally this option is Enabled so that an Internet connection will be made automatically whenever Internet bound traffic is detected In locations where Internet access is billed by the minu
9. a From the main menu VPN section click on the IKE Policies link and then click the Add button to display the screen below IKE Policy Configuration General Policy Name Scenario_1 Direction Type Both Directions Exchange Mode Main Mode v Local Local Identity Local IP address 2 Name Remote Remote Identity Remote IP address Name IKE SA Parameters Encryption Algorithm 3DES Authentication Algorithm Authentication Pre shared Key Method SHAT hr5xb8416aa9r6 RSA Signature Diffie Hellman DH Group SA Life Time 28800 secs Figure 8 14 Scenario 1 IKE Policy b Configure the IKE Policy according to the settings in the illustration above and click Apply to save your settings For more information on IKE Policy topics please see IKE Policies Automatic Key and Authentication Management on page 8 3 8 22 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 4 Set up the FWG114P v2 VPN Auto Policy illustrated below a From the main menu VPN section click on the VPN Policies link and then click on the Add Auto Policy button VPN Auto Policy General Policy Name scenariola IKE policy Scenario_ WAN IP Remote VPN Endpoint 22 23 24 2s lt SA Life Time a00 istess address o __ Ky
10. E E E E E E E tena duel E E E ET a alias ig Cable e ua saaana e B 13 B 14 Uplink adek aia Cables and MDI MDIX Switchin Appendix C Preparing Your Network Preparing Your Computers for TCP IP Networking scesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetaeeseee O71 Configuring Windows 95 98 and Me for TCP IP Networking csccesteeeeteeeeeeees O72 Install or Verify Windows Networking Component 0 c eee see sree teenes O72 Enabling DHCP to Automatically Configure TCP IP Settings seseeseeees C 4 Selecting Windows Internet Access Method ccccccseseeeeeeteeeeteseettesttenes O74 Verifying TCP IP Properties ere A meres fs Configuring Windows NT 2000 or XP foes IP P Networking a E A Mo Installing or Verifying Windows Networking Hupe PE MANA OAN AE EEEE C 5 Verifying TCP IP Properties C 6 Configuring the Macintosh for TCP I P aioe retarded ae MacOS 8B or IX Gannenn eee a ater eee et ten ney Ore strt UPy ei iaia O D MacOS X C 7 Verifying TCP IP Prope C 8 Verifying the Readiness of Your Internet Account cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteteteetaeeees O 9 Ko Lodin Pronto WIS spisar Maal What Is Your Configuration ionnan PARP E E E E E INT C 9 Obtaining ISP Configuration Information for Windows Compier P ET T C410 Obtaining ISP Configuration Information for Macintosh Computers 0 C 11 x Contents 201 10301 02 May 2005 Rastaring the N MNGIK
11. Enable Authentication Use this checkbox to enable or disable ESP transform for this VPN policy You can also select the ESP mode with this menu Two ESP modes are available e Plain ESP e ESP with authentication Authentication If you enable AH then use this menu to select which authentication Algorithm algorithm will be employed The choices are e MD6 is the default e SHA1 is more secure NETBIOS Enable Check this if you wish NETBIOS traffic to be forwarded over the VPN tunnel The NETBIOS protocol is used by Microsoft Networking for such features as Network Neighborhood VPN Policy Configuration for Manual Key Exchange With Manual Key Management you will not use an IKE policy You must manually type in all the required key information Click the VPN Policies link from the VPN section of the main menu to display the menu shown below Virtual Private Networking 8 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPN Policies General Policy Table Enable Name Type Locat Remote aH Add Manual Policy _ EY Policy Name Remote VPN Endpoint Address Type IP Address v Address Data Traffic Selector Local IP Select Start IP address Finish IP address Subnet Mask Add Auto Policy
12. Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 NET an NETGEAR Inc 4500 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 USA 201 10301 02 May 2005 201 10301 02 May 2005 2005 by NETGEAR Inc All rights reserved Trademarks NETGEAR is a trademark of Netgear Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other brand and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability NETGEAR reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice NETGEAR does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Federal Communications Commission FCC Compliance Notice Radio Frequency Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
13. Serial Port Internet Access If you use a dial up account record the following Account User Name Password Telephone number Alternative number Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Connecting the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server This section provides instructions for connecting the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server Also the Resource CD for the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P SW 10023 03 included with your router contains an animated Installation Assistant to help you through this procedure Verify That Basic Requirements Are Met Assure that the following requirements are met e You have your broadband Internet service settings handy e The computer is configured to obtain an IP address automatically via DHCP For instructions on how to do this please see the Reference Manual on the Resource CD for the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P SW 10023 03 1 CONNECT THE WRELESS HREVALL PRINT SERVER a Turn off your computer and cable or DSL modem b Disconnect the Ethernet cable A from your computer which connects to the broadband modem eA Disconnect from A m computer El g Cable or DSL modem Figure 3 1 Disconnect the broadband modem 3 4 Conne
14. Troubleshooting Wizard Detected Fixed IP Account Setup If the Setup Wizard determines that your Internet service account uses Fixed IP assignment you will be directed to the menu shown in Figure 3 11 below Account Name If Required FWG114P Domain Name If Required Internet IP Address Get Dynamically From ISP Use Static IP Address IP Address jo 0 o lo IP Subnet Mask b Lb Lb lbo Gateway IP Address o Lo lo I lo Domain Name Server DNS Address Get Automatically From ISP Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS sas Secondary DNS I Router s MAC Address Use Default Address Ouse This Computer s MAC O Use This MAC Address Apply Cancel Test Figure 3 11 Setup Wizard menu for Fixed IP address 3 14 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 1 Enter your assigned IP Address Subnet Mask and the IP Address of your ISP s gateway router This information should have been provided to you by your ISP You will need the configuration parameters from your ISP you recorded in Record Your Internet Connection Information on page 3 2 Enter the IP address of your ISP s Primary DNS Server If a Secondary DNS Server address is available enter it also Note DNS servers are required to perform the fu
15. i Network Subnet Node Figure 11 2 Example of Subnetting a Class B Address A Class B address can be effectively translated into multiple Class C addresses For example the IP address of 172 16 0 0 is assigned but node addresses are limited to 255 maximum allowing eight extra bits to use as a subnet address The IP address of 172 16 97 235 would be interpreted as IP network address 172 16 subnet number 97 and node number 235 In addition to extending the number of addresses available subnet addressing provides other benefits Subnet addressing allows a network manager to construct an address scheme for the network by using different subnets for other geographical locations in the network or for other departments in the organization Although the preceding example uses the entire third octet for a subnet address note that you are not restricted to octet boundaries in subnetting To create more network numbers you need only shift some bits from the host address to the network address For instance to partition a Class C network number 192 68 135 0 into two you shift one bit from the host address to the network address The new netmask or subnet mask is 255 255 255 128 The first subnet has network number 192 68 135 0 with hosts 192 68 135 1 to 129 68 135 126 and the second subnet has network number 192 68 135 128 with hosts 192 68 135 129 to 192 68 135 254 i Note The number 192 68 135 127 is not assigned because it is th
16. A inn aa AE FQDN eae netgear dydns org WAN IP 172 23 9 1 22 23 24 25 Figure H 1 Addressing and Subnet Used for Examples Using DDNS and Fully Qualified Domain Names FQDN Many ISPs Internet Service Providers provide connectivity to their customers using dynamic instead of static IP addressing This means that a user s IP address does not remain constant over time which presents a challenge for gateways attempting to establish VPN connectivity A Dynamic DNS DDNS service allows a user whose public IP address is dynamically assigned to be located by a host or domain name It provides a central public database where information such as e mail addresses host names and IP addresses can be stored and retrieved Now a gateway can be configured to use a 3 party service in lieu of a permanent and unchanging IP address to establish bi directional VPN connectivity To use DDNS you must register with a DDNS service provider Example DDNS Service Providers include Table H 1 Example DDNS Service Providers DynDNS www dyndns org TZO com netgear tzo com ngDDNS ngddns iego net In this example Gateway A is configured using an example FQDN provided by a DDNS Service provider In this case we established the hostname netgear dyndns org for Gateway A using the H 2 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wi
17. If this is checked you must enter the login name and password for your mail server Tip You used this information when you set up your e mail program If you cannot remember it check the settings in your e mail program e Send E mail alerts immediately You can specify that logs are immediately sent to the specified e mail address when any of the following events occur 6 14 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Ifa Denial of Service attack is detected Ifa Port Scan is detected Ifauser on your LAN attempts to access a website that you blocked using Keyword blocking e Send logs according to this schedule You can specify that logs are sent to you according to a schedule Select whether you would like to receive the logs Hourly Daily Weekly When Full or None for no logs Depending on your selection you may also need to specify Day for sending log Relevant when the log is sent weekly or daily Time for sending log Relevant when the log is sent daily or weekly If the Weekly Daily or Hourly option is selected and the log fills up before the specified period the log is automatically e mailed to the specified e mail address After the log is sent the log is cleared from the router s memory If the router cannot e mail the log file the log buffer may fill up In this case the ro
18. May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 12VDC 1 08 n Figure 1 2 FWG114P v2 Rear Panel Viewed from left to right the rear panel contains the following features e Wireless antenna e DB 9 serial port for modem connection e USB 2 0 Printer Port e Factory Default Reset push button e Four Ethernet LAN ports e Internet Ethernet WAN port for connecting the router to a broadband modem e AC power adapter outlet Introduction 2 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 10 Introduction 201 10301 02 May 2005 Chapter 3 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet This chapter describes how to set up the router on your local area network LAN and connect to the Internet You will find out how to configure your ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 for Internet access using the Setup Wizard or how to manually configure your Internet connection What You Will Need Before You Begin You need to prepare these three things before you begin 1 An active Internet service such as those provided by a cable or DSL broadband account 2 Locate the Internet Service Provider ISP configuration information for your broadband account 3 Connect the router to a broadband modem and a computer as explained below Cabling and Computer Hardware R
19. May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Step By Step Configuration of FWG114P Gateway B 1 Log in to the NETGEAR FVS328 labeled Gateway B as in the illustration Out of the box the FVS328 is set for its default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with its default user name of admin and default password of password For this example we will assume you have set the local LAN address as 172 23 9 1 for Gateway B and have set your own user name and password 2 Click the IKE Policies link under the VPN category link on the left side of the Settings management GUI This will open the IKE Policies Menu Click Add This will open a new screen titled IKE Policy Configuration IKE Policy Configuration General Policy Name FVS31 3 Direction Type Both Directions Exchange Mode Main Mode x Local Local Identity Type WAN IP Address 7 Local Identity Data 22 23 24 25 232425 Remote Remote Identity Type Fully Qualilied Domain Name Remote Identity Data fnetgear dyndns org Figure G 5 NETGEAR FVS328 IKE Policy Configuration Part 1 Enter an appropriate name for the policy in the Policy Name field This name is not supplied to the remote VPN Endpoint It is used to help you manage the IKE policies In our example we have used FVS318 as the Policy Name In the Policy Name field type FVS318 From the Direction Type drop down box select Both Dir
20. Note If your ISP assigns a private WAN IP address such as 192 168 x x or 10 x x x gt the dynamic DNS service will not work because private addresses will not be routed on the Internet 10 4 Advanced Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Using the LAN IP Setup Options The second feature category under the Advanced heading is LAN IP Setup This menu allows configuration of LAN IP services such as DHCP and RIP From the Main Menu of the browser interface under Advanced click on LAN IP Setup to view the LAN IP Setup menu shown below LAN IP Setup LAN TCPAP Setup IP Address 192 168 o Ih IP Subnet Mask i255 255 255 o RIP Direction Both RIP Version RIP 4 Use Router As DHCP Server Starting IP Address ig2 hes Lo le Ending IP Address i92 fes o fso Address Reservation IP Address Device Name MAC Address Figure 10 2 LAN IP Setup Menu Configuring LAN TCP IP Setup Parameters The router is shipped preconfigured to use private IP addresses on the LAN side and to act as a DHCP server The router s default LAN IP configuration is e LAN IP addresses 192 168 0 1 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Advanced Configuration 10 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 These addresses are part of the IETF
21. November 1998 e RFC 2407 D Piper The Internet IP Security Domain of Interpretation for ISAKMP November 1998 e RFC 2474 K Nichols S Blake F Baker D Black Definition of the Differentiated Services Field DS Field in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers December 1998 e RFC 2475 S Blake D Black M Carlson E Davies Z Wang and W Weiss An Architecture for Differentiated Services December 1998 e RFC 2481 K Ramakrishnan S Floyd A Proposal to Add Explicit Congestion Notification ECN to IP January 1999 e RFC 2408 D Maughan M Schertler M Schneider J Turner Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol ISAKMP e RFC 2409 D Harkins D Carrel Internet Key Exchange IKE protocol e RFC 2401 S Kent R Atkinson Security Architecture for the Internet Protocol F 12 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Appendix G NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 This appendix provides a case study on how to configure a secure IPSec VPN tunnel between a NETGEAR FVS318 or FVM318 to a FWG114P v2 The configuration options and screens for the FVS318 and FVM318 are the same Configuration Template The configuration in this document follows the addressing and configuration mechanics defined by the VPN Consortium Gather all the necessary information before you begin the configuration process Verify whether the firmware is up to date
22. Reference Manual v2 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 For dial up Standard Modem should work in most cases Otherwise select your modem from the list If your modem is not on the list select User Defined and enter the Modem Properties If you are using the User Defined selection and configuring your own modem stings fill in the Modem Properties settings Note You can validate modem string settings by first connecting the modem directly to a computer establishing a connection to your ISP and then copying the modem string settings from the computer configuration and pasting them into the FWG114P v2 Modem Properties Initial String field For more information on this procedure please refer to the support area of the NETGEAR Web site 4 Click Apply to save your settings Configuring Auto Rollover You can configure the serial port of the FWG114P v2 to provide an auto rollover backup connection for your broadband service Be sure you have prepared the basic requirements listed below then follow the how to procedure Basic Requirements for Auto Rollover Auto Rollover requires these elements 1 A broadband connection to the FWG114P v2 2 An ISDN or analog phone line with an active ISDN or dial up ISP account 3 A serial modem properly configured and attached to the DB9 connector on the serial port 4 The Auto Rollover settings co
23. Translation MAC Address IP Address DHCP IP Subnet Mask Domain Name Server LAN Port MAC Address IP Address DHCP IP Subnet Mask Wireless Port Name SSID Region Channel Mode Wireless AP Broadcast Name Serial Port Modem Dial in Internet Access LAN to LAN FYWG114P 0 0_03 Off Line ON 00 0f b5 1b ea cf 10 1 32 80 Dynamic 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 6 10 1 1 7 WAN Status 00 0fb5 1b ea ce 192 168 0 1 ON 255 255 255 0 NETGEAR 10 gandb ON ON Standard Modem Disable Disable Disable Details Show Statistics Figure 9 1 Router Status screen The Router Status screen shows the following parameters Table 9 1 Status Fields Field Description System Name The System Name assigned to the router Firmware Version The router firmware version 9 2 201 10301 02 May 2005 Maintenance Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table 9 1 Status Fields Field Description Printer Status The printer status WAN Port MAC Address IP Address DHCP IP Subnet Mask Domain Name Server LAN Port MAC Address IP Address DHCP IP Subnet Mask These parameters apply to the Internet WAN port of the router This field displays the MAC address being used by the Internet WAN port of the router This field displays the IP address being used by the Internet W
24. Wireless Access Point M Enable Wireless Access Point M Allow Broadcast of Name SSID Wireless Station Access List Setup Access List Wireless Security WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Encryption TKIP AES gt Passphrase fT 8 63 characters Key Lifetime 5 minutes Apply Cancel Figure 4 11 Wireless Settings menu WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK 3 Select WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK on the pulldown menu The WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK menu will open 4 Select the desired Encryption method For WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK the only option is TKIP AES WPA clients must use TKIP and WPA2 clients must use AES 5 Enter the pre shared key in the Passphrase field Enter a word or group of printable characters in the Passphrase box The Passphrase must be 8 to 63 characters in length The 256 Bit key used for encryption is generated from this passphrase 6 Enter the Key Lifetime This setting determines how often the encryption key is changed Shorter periods provide greater security but adversely affect performance If desired you can change the default value 7 Click Apply to save your settings 4 22 Wireless Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Chapter 5 Serial Port Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the serial port options of your ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The FWG114P v2 serial port lets you share the broadband connection of another FWG114P v2 share resources between two LANs and
25. all of the addresses that will be necessary and all of the parameters that need to be set on both sides Check that there are no firewall restrictions Table G 1 Summary VPN Consortium Scenario Scenario 1 Type of VPN LAN to LAN or Gateway to Gateway not PC Client to Gateway Security Scheme IKE with Preshared Secret Key not Certificate based Date Tested December 2003 Model Firmware Tested NETGEAR Gateway A FVS318 firmware version A1 4 or 2 0 FVM318 firmware version 1 1 NETGEAR Gateway B FWG114P with firmware version 2 Release 2 IP Addressing NETGEAR Gateway A Static IP address NETGEAR Gateway B Static IP address NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 G 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 10 5 6 0 24 VPNC Example 172 23 9 0 24 405 64 WAN IP DA AN IP Network Interface Addressing Gateway A Gateway B 14 15 16 17 22 23 24 25 LAN IP RNET 172 23 9 1 Figure G 1 Addressing and Subnet Used for Examples Step By Step Configuration of FVS318 or FVM318 Gateway A 1 Log in to the FVS318 or FVM318 labeled Gateway A as in the illustration Out of the box the FVS318 or FVM318 is set for its default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with its default user name of admin and default password of password For this ex
26. including e Internet access via either the serial or broadband port e Auto fail over connectivity through an analog or ISDN modem connected to the serial port If the broadband Internet connection fails after waiting for an amount of time you specify the FWGI114P v2 can automatically establish a backup ISDN or dial up Internet connection via the serial port on the firewall e Remote Access Server RAS that allows you to log in remotely through the serial port to access a server on your LAN other LAN resources or the Internet based on a user name and password you define e LAN to LAN access between two FWG114P v2 wireless firewall print servers through the serial port with the option of enabling auto failover Internet access across the serial LAN to LAN connection 802 119 and 802 11b Wireless Networking The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server includes an 802 11g compliant wireless access point The access point provides e 802 11b standards based wireless networking at up to 11 Mbps e 802 11g wireless networking at up to 54 Mbps which conforms to the 802 11g standard e WPA and WPA2 enterprise class strong security with RADIUS and certificate authentication as well as dynamic encryption key generation e WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK pre shared key authentication without the overhead of RADIUS servers but with all of the strong security of WPA and WPA2 e 64 bit and 128 bit WEP encryption security e WEP keys can be generat
27. of pre shared keys during initial key exchange as the authentication and key generation mechanism Once the keys are established and the tunnel is set up the connection proceeds according to the VPN policy Certificate Revocation List CRL Each Certification Authority CA maintains a list of the revoked certificates The list of these revoked certificates is known as the Certificate Revocation List CRL Whenever an IKE policy receives the certificate from a peer it checks for this certificate in the CRL on the FWG114P v2 obtained from the corresponding CA If the certificate is not present in the CRL it means that the certificate is not revoked IKE can then use this certificate for authentication If the certificate is present in the CRL it means that the certificate is revoked and the IKE will not authenticate the client You must manually update the FWG114P v2 CRL regularly in order for the CA based authentication process to remain valid 8 14 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Walk Through of Configuration Scenarios on the FWG114P v2 There are a variety of configurations you might implement with the FWG114P v2 The scenarios listed below illustrate typical configurations you might use in your organization In order to help make it easier to set up an IPsec system the following two scenarios are provided These sce
28. supports WPA2 Nevertheless the wireless adapter hardware and driver must also support WPA2 Consult the product document for your wireless adapter and WP2 client software for instructions on configuring WPA2 settings To configure WPA2 PSK follow these steps 1 Log in at the default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with the default user name of admin and default password of password or using whatever LAN address and password you have set up 2 Click Wireless Settings in the main menu of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name SSID NETGEAR Region Select Region gt Channel i0 2 457GH2 gt Current Channel No 10 2 457GHz Mode E and b Wireless Access Point M Enable Wireless Access Point M Allow Broadcast of Name SSID Wireless Station Access List Setup Access List Wireless Security l WPA2 PSK Encryption AES x Passphrase h 4 8 63 characters Key Lifetime 5 minutes Apply Cancel Figure 4 10 Wireless Settings menu WPA2 PSK 3 Select WPA2 PSK on the pulldown menu The WPA2 PSK menu will open 4 20 Wireless Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 4 Select the desired Encryption method For WPA2 PSK the only option is AES 5 Enter the pre shared key in the Passphrase field Enter a word or group of printable characters in the Passphrase box The Passphrase must b
29. 02 May 2005 Bestatigung des Herstellers Importeurs Es wird hiermit best tigt da das ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 gem der im BMPT AmtsblVfg 243 1991 und Vfg 46 1992 aufgef hrten Bestimmungen entstort ist Das vorschriftsmafige Betreiben einiger Ger te z B Testsender kann jedoch gewissen Beschr nkungen unterliegen Lesen Sie dazu bitte die Anmerkungen in der Betriebsanleitung Das Bundesamt fiir Zulassungen in der Telekommunikation wurde davon unterrichtet da dieses Ger t auf den Markt gebracht wurde und es ist berechtigt die Serie auf die Erf llung der Vorschriften hin zu berpr fen Certificate of the Manufacturer Importer It is hereby certified that the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 has been suppressed in accordance with the conditions set out in the BMPT AmtsblVfg 243 1991 and Vfg 46 1992 The operation of some equipment for example test transmitters in accordance with the regulations may however be subject to certain restrictions Please refer to the notes in the operating instructions Federal Office for Telecommunications Approvals has been notified of the placing of this equipment on the market and has been granted the right to test the series for compliance with the regulations Voluntary Control Council for Interference VCCI Statement This equipment is in the second category information equipment to be used in a residential area or an ad
30. 10 NETGEAR FWG114P v2 VPN Policies Menu Post Configuration 6 When the screen returns to the VPN Policies make sure the Enable check box is selected Click the Apply button Test the VPN Connection 1 From a PC behind the NETGEAR FVS318 or FVM318 gateway A attempt to ping the remote FWG114P v2 gateway B LAN Interface address example address 172 23 9 1 2 From a PC behind the FWG114P v2 gateway B attempt to ping the remote NETGEAR FVS318 or FVM318 gateway A LAN Interface address example address 10 5 6 1 3 Click the Broadband Status link on the left side of the FWG114P v2 Settings management GUI Click the Show VPN Status button below This will take you to the IPSec Connection Status Screen If the connection is functioning properly the State fields will show Estab 4 Click the Router Status link on the left side of the FVS318 Settings management GUI Click the Show VPN Logs button below NETGEAR log files should be similar to the example below NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 G 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 G 10 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 201 10301 02 May 2005 Appendix H NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 This appendix provides a case study on how to configure a VPN tunnel between a NETGEAR FVS318 or FVM318 to a FWG114P v2 using
31. 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Using Digital Certificates for IKE Auto Policy Authentication Digital certificates are strings generated using encryption and authentication schemes which cannot be duplicated by anyone without access to the different values used in the production of the string They are issued by Certification Authorities CAs to authenticate a person or a workstation uniquely The CAs are authorized to issue these certificates by Policy Certification Authorities PCAs who are in turn certified by the Internet Policy Registration Authority IPRA The FWG114P v2 is able to use certificates to authenticate users at the end points during the IKE key exchange process The certificates can be obtained from a certificate server an organization might maintain internally or from the established public CAs The certificates are produced by providing the particulars of the user being identified to the CA The information provided may include the user s name e mail ID domain name and so on Each CA has its own certificate The certificates of a CA are added to the FWG114P v2 and can then be used to form IKE policies for the user Once a CA certificate is added to the FWG114P v2 and a certificate is created for a user the corresponding IKE policy is added to the FWG114P v2 Whenever the user tries to send traffic through the FWG114P v2 the certificates are used in place
32. 3 Remote IP and Pre shared Key VWhatis the remote WAN static IP address or Internet name Figure 8 7 Remote IP 4 Identify the IP addresses at the target endpoint which can use this tunnel and click Next VPN Wizard Step 3 of 3 Secure Connection Remote Accessibility VWihat is the remote LAN IP subnet IP Address lo o jo J0 Subnet Mask 0 llo Jo Jo Figure 8 8 Secure Connection Remote Accessibility The Summary screen below displays Virtual Private Networking 8 17 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPN Wizard Summary Connection Name Remote YPN Endpoint Remote Client Access Remote IP Remote ID Local Client Access Local IP Local ID Please verify your inputs GtoG 22 23 24 25 By Subnet 192 168 3 1 255 255 255 0 By subnet 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 You can click here to view the VPNC recommended parameters Please click Done to apply the changes Figure 8 9 VPN Wizard Summary To view the VPNC recommended authentication and encryption Phase 1 and Phase 2 settings the VPN Wizard used click the here link 5 Click Done to complete the configuration procedure The VPN Settings menu displays showing that the new tunnel is enabled To view or modify the tunnel settings select the radio button next to the tunnel entry and click Edit 8 18 Virtual
33. 32 to 104 F 90 maximum relative humidity noncondensing Technical Specifications A 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Electromagnetic Emissions For North America and Australia For Japan For Europe Interface Specifications LAN WAN Printer Serial Wireless Data Encoding Maximum Computers Per Wireless Network 802 11b and g Radio Data Rate 802 11b and g Transmit Power and Receive Sensitivity Antenna 802 11 Security FCC Part 15 Class B VCCI Class B EN 300 328 EN 301 489 17 EN 301 489 1 EN 60950 10BASE T or 1OOBASE Tx RJ 45 10BASE T or 1OOBASE Tx USB v1 1 RS 232 male DB 9 connector 802 11b Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS 802 11g Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM Limited by the amount of wireless network traffic generated by each node Typically 30 70 nodes 1 2 5 5 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps Auto rate capable 54 Mbps 11g 48 Mbps 11g 36 Mbps 11g 24 Mbps 11g 18Mbps 11g 12 Mbps 11g 6 Mbps 11g 11 Mbps 11b 5 5 Mbps 11b 2 Mbps 11b 1Mbps 11b 14 5 dBm typical 14 5 dBm typical 15 5 dBm typical 15 5 dBm typical 16 5 dBm typical 16 5 dBm typical 16 5 dBm typical 17 5 dBm typical 17 5 dBm typical 17 5 dBm typical 17 5 dBm typical Maximum Transmit Power Receive Sensitivity 72 dBm typical 75 dBm typical 80dBm
34. 5 Click Apply to save your settings 6 Click Test to test your Internet connection If the NETGEAR Web site does not appear within one minute refer to Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 3 12 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Wizard Detected Dynamic IP Account Setup If the Setup Wizard determines that your Internet service account uses Dynamic IP assignment you will be directed to the menu shown in Figure 3 10 below Dynamic IP Account Name if Required Domain Name If Required Domain Name Server DNS Address Get Automatically From ISP Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS 1 Secondary DNS fo Router s MAC Address Use Default Address Use This MAC Address Apply Cancel Test Figure 3 10 Setup Wizard menu for Dynamic IP address 1 Enter your Account Name may also be called Host Name and Domain Name These parameters may be necessary to access your ISP s services such as mail or news servers If you leave the Domain Name field blank the firewall will attempt to learn the domain automatically from the ISP If this is not successful you may need to enter it manually 2 If you know that your ISP does not automatically transmit DNS addresses to the firewall during login select Use these DNS servers and enter the IP address of your ISP s Primary DNS Server If a Secondary
35. 63 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 LAN Drop ICMP Flood Fri 2003 12 05 21 33 52 UDP Packet Source 127 0 0 1 0 WAN Destination 172 31 12 157 0 LAN Drop Fragment Attack Pri 2003 12 05 19 720 00 TCP Session Source 54 148 179 175 58595 LAN Destination 192 168 0 1 20 FTP Data WAN Reset SYN Flood Fri 2003 12 05 19 21 22 UDP Packet Source 172 31 12 156 7 LAN Destination 172 31 12 157 7 WAN Drop UDP Flood Fri 2003 12 05 20 59 08 ICMP Echo Request packet Source 192 168 0 5 LAN Destination 172 31 12 99 WAN Drop ICMP Flood Fri 2003 12 05 18 07 29 TCP Packet Source 192 168 0 10 1725 LAN Destination 61 177 58 50 1352 WAN Drop TCP incomplete sessions overflow Fri 2003 12 05 21 11 24 TCP Packet Source 192 168 0 10 2342 LAN Destination 61 177 58 50 1352 WAN Drop First TCP Packet not SYN otes DESCRIPTION SYN Flood UDP Flood ICMP Flood IP Spoofing TearDrop Brute Force SYN with Data Scan Set Other Scan TCP incomplete sessions overflow Ping of Death Full Xmas Scan SYN FIN Scan Fragment Attack Full Head Scan Null Scan Nmap Xmas Scan TCP preconnect traffic Targa3 Attack Full Sapu Scan Vecna Scan Big Bomb FIN Tcp SYN RI ES TCP invalid traffic First TCP Packet not SYN First TCP Packet with no SYN lt DATE gt lt T
36. 7 O 8 Edit Delete Cancel Figure H 3 NETGEAR FVS318 VPN Settings Pre Configuration 7 Click the radio button of first available VPN leg all 8 links are available in the example Click Edit This will take you to the VPN Settings Main Mode Menu H 4 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Connection Name Local IPSec Identifier VPN Settings Main Mode toFVS 328 netgear dyndns org Remote IPSec Identifier 22 23 24 25 Tunnel can be accessed fram a subnet of local address Local LAN startiP Address ho 5 le lo Local LAN finish IP Address I Local LAN IP Subnetmask 255 255 J255 0 Tunnel can access a subnet of remote address Remote LAN statiP Address 172 23 Jo o Remote LAN finish IP Address Remote LAN IP Subnetmask 255 11255 255 O Remote WAN IP or FQDN 22 23 24 25 Secure Association Main Mode v Figure H 4 NETGEAR FVS318 VPN Settings part 1 Main Mode Inthe Connection Name box enter in a unique name for the VPN tunnel to be configured between the NETGEAR devices For this example we have used toFVS328 Enter a Local IPSec Identifier name for the NETGEAR FVS318 Gateway A This name must be entered in the other endpoint as Remote IPSec Identifier In this example we used netgear dyndns org the FQDN
37. 802 11b g wireless nodes communicate with each other using radio frequency signals in the ISM Industrial Scientific and Medical band between 2 4 GHz and 2 5 GHz Neighboring channels are 5 MHz apart However due to spread spectrum effect of the signals a node sending signals using a particular channel will utilize frequency spectrum 12 5 MHz above and below the center channel frequency As a result two separate wireless networks using neighboring channels for example channel 1 and channel 2 in the same general vicinity will interfere with each other Applying two channels that allow the maximum channel separation will decrease the amount of channel cross talk and provide a noticeable performance increase over networks with minimal channel separation The radio frequency channels used in 802 11b g networks are listed in Table E 2 Table E 2 802 11b g Radio Frequency Channels Channel Center Frequency Frequency Spread 1 2412 MHz 2399 5 MHz 2424 5 MHz 2417 MHz 2404 5 MHz 2429 5 MHz 2422 MHz 2409 5 MHz 2434 5 MHz Wireless Networking Basics E 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table E 2 802 11b g Radio Frequency Channels Channel Center Frequency Frequency Spread 4 2427 MHz 2414 5 MHz 2439 5 MHz 5 2432 MHz 2419 5 MHz 2444 5 MHz 6 2437 MHz 2424 5 MHz 2449 5 MHz 7 2442 MHz 2429 5
38. ALLOW always Send to LAN Server T gt e ppan p ft WAN Users Address Range y start 134 177 ee it finish 134 177 ee 254 Log Not Match gt Back Cancel Figure 6 4 Rule example Videoconference from Restricted Addresses Example Port Forwarding for VPN Tunnels when NAT is Off If you want to allow incoming VPN IPSec tunnels to be initiated from outside IP addresses anywhere on the Internet when NAT is off first create a service and then an inbound rule 6 8 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Services Service Definition Name IPSec o Type ubp M Start Port s00 Finish Port soo Back Apply Jf Cancel Figure 6 5 Service example port forwarding for VPN when NAT is Off In the example shown in Figure 6 5 UDP port 500 connections are defined as the IPSec service Inbound Services Service IPSec UDP 500 i Action ALLOW always he Send to LAN Server Any vi WAN Users Any rmi x stat 0 __ jo fo finish 5 Log Never v Back Apply Cancel Figure 6 6 Inbound rule example VPN IPSec when NAT is off In the example shown in Figure 6 6 VPN IPSec connections are allowed for any internal LAN IP address Outbound Rules Service Blocking or Port Filtering The FWG114P v2 allows you
39. Configure Port lt Back Cancel Windows Add Printer Wizard Print Server 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Print a test page to verify successful printing on your network a Upon completion of the Add Printer Wizard print a test page From the Windows Start menu select Setup gt Printers Highlight the printer you just added Right click and the select Properties The printer properties dialog box opens to the General tab page On the General tab page click Print Test Page b Check the printer attached to the FWG114P v2 to see that the test page printed successfully If you are unable to print a test page see Troubleshooting the Print Server on page 12 Printing from the Macintosh Macintosh computers can connect to a TCP IP network printer using the Line Printer Remote LPR protocol LPR printing can be set up on any Macintosh that has Desktop Printing installed or available Desktop Printing is supported on MacOS versions beginning from 8 1 LaserWriter8 version 8 5 1 or higher is also required To configure the Macintosh to use the print server follow these steps 1 From the Apple Extras folder under Apple LaserWriter Software launch the Desktop Printing Utility A new window titled New Desktop Printer appears 2 Select LaserWriter 8 in the With drop down menu 3 Sele
40. DNS Server address is available enter it also Note DNS servers are required to perform the function of translating an Internet name such as www netgear com to a numeric IP address For a fixed IP address configuration you must obtain DNS server addresses from your ISP and enter them manually here You should reboot your PCs after configuring the firewall for these settings to take effect 3 The Router s MAC Address is the Ethernet MAC address that will be used by the firewall on the Internet port Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 13 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 If your ISP allows access from only one specific computer s Ethernet MAC address select Use this MAC address The firewall will then capture and use the MAC address of the computer that you are now using You must be using the one computer that is allowed by the ISP Otherwise you can type in a MAC address Note Some ISPs will register the Ethernet MAC address of the network interface card in your computer when your account is first opened They will then only accept traffic from the MAC address of that computer This feature allows your firewall to masquerade as that computer by using its MAC address 4 Click Apply to save your settings 5 Click Test to test your Internet connection If the NETGEAR Web site does not appear within one minute refer to Chapter 11
41. FOUND IDs EXTRACE ID INFO 45 lt Initiator IPADDR 192 168 0 3 gt 45 lt Responder IPADDR 192 168 0 0 MASK 255 255 255 0 gt 45 SENT OUT SECOND MESSAGE OF QUICK MODE 45 RECEIVED THIRD MESSAGE OF QUICK MODE 45 lt POLICY VPNclient gt PAYLOADS HASH 46 QUICK MODE COMPLETED 46 IKE PHASE 2 ESTABLISHED Refresh Clear Log Policy Name Endpoint c0a80003 64 175 249 42 ESP 0 28760 Protocol Tx KBytes HLifeTime INc0a80003 66 120 188 153 ESP 0 28760 SLifeTime 28670 0 Policy Name Endpoint 1 VPNclient 64 175 249 42 State LifeTime in Secs SA MATURE 0 Figure 8 36 FWG114P v2 VPN Status screen 8 48 201 10301 02 May 2005 Virtual Private Networking Chapter 9 Maintenance This chapter describes how to use the maintenance features of your ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 These features are accessed via the Main Menu Maintenance heading Viewing Wireless Firewall Print Server Status Information The Router Status menu provides status and usage information From the main menu of the browser interface click on Maintenance then select Router Status to view this screen Maintenance 9 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Router Status System Name Firmware Version Printer Status WAN Port NAT Network Address
42. Furthermore if you turn NAT off and plan to use VPN you will have to open UDP port 500 in the Security settings according to the instructions at Click Next to proceed Input your ISP settings as needed At the end of the Setup Wizard click the Test button to verify your Internet connection and register your product If you have trouble connecting to the Internet use the Troubleshooting Tips below to correct basic problems or refer to the Reference Manual on the CD If you were unable to connect to the firewall please refer to Basic Functioning Basic Functioning on page 11 1 You are now connected to the Internet Note For wireless placement and range guidelines and wireless configuration instructions please see Chapter 4 Wireless Configuration Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Basic Setup Troubleshooting Tips Here are some tips for correcting simple problems that prevent with you from connecting to the Internet or connecting to the wireless firewall print server Be sure to restart your network in the correct sequence Follow this sequence Turn off the modem wireless firewall print server and computer Turn on the modem first and wait two minutes Next turn on the wireless firewall print server and finally the computer Make sure the Ethernet cables are securely plugge
43. Ifnot already selected select Built in Ethernet in the Configure list 3 If not already selected Select Using DHCP in the TCP IP tab 4 Click Save Preparing Your Network C 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Verifying TCP IP Properties for Macintosh Computers After your Macintosh is configured and has rebooted you can check the TCP IP configuration by returning to the TCP IP Control Panel From the Apple menu select Control Panels then TCP IP o TCP IP E Connect via Ethernet Setup Configure Using DHCP Server IP Address 192 168 0 2 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Router address 192 168 0 1 Search domains Name server addr 192 168 0 1 The panel is updated to show your settings which should match the values below if you are using the default TCP IP settings that NETGEAR recommends e The IP Address is between 192 168 0 2 and 192 168 0 254 e The Subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 e The Router address is 192 168 0 1 If you do not see these values you may need to restart your Macintosh or you may need to switch the Configure setting to a different option then back again to Using DHCP Server C 8 Preparing Your Network 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Verifying the Readiness of
44. MIMO refers to radio links with multiple antennas at the transmitter and the receiver side to improve the performance of the wireless link NAT Network Address Translation A network capability that enables a houseful of computers to dynamically share a single incoming IP address from a dial up cable or xDSL connection NAT takes the single incoming IP address and creates new IP address for each client computer on the network Network name Identifies the wireless network for all the shared components During the installation process for most wireless networks you need to enter the network name or SSID Different network names are used when setting up your individual computer wired network or workgroup NIC Network Interface Card A type of PC adapter card that either works without wires Wi Fi or attaches to a network cable to provide two way communication between the computer and network devices such as a hub or switch Most office wired NICs operate at 10 Mbps Ethernet 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet or 10 100 Mbps dual speed High speed Gigabit and 10 Gigabit NIC cards are also available See PC Card PC card also called PCMCIA A removable credit card sized memory or I O input output device that fits into a Type 2 PCMCIA standard slot PC Cards are used primarily in PCs portable computers PDAs and laptops PC Card peripherals include Wi Fi cards memory cards modems NICs hard drives etc PCI adapter A high performance I O co
45. Preamble Type A long transmit preamble may provide a more reliable connection or slightly longer range A short transmit preamble gives better performance Advanced Configuration 10 13 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 10 14 Advanced Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting This chapter gives information about troubleshooting your ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 After each problem description instructions are provided to help you diagnose and solve the problem Basic Functioning After you turn on power to the router the following sequence of events should occur 1 When power is first applied verify that the PWR LED is on 2 After approximately 10 seconds verify that a The TEST LED is not lit b The LAN port LEDs are lit for any local ports that are connected If a port s LED is lit a link has been established to the connected device If a LAN port is connected to a 100 Mbps device verify that the port s LED is green If the port is 10 Mbps the LED will be OFF c The Internet port LED is lit If any of these conditions does not occur refer to the appropriate following section Power LED Not On If the Power and other LEDs are off when your router is turned on e Make sure that the power cord is properly connected to your router and that the power supply
46. Print Server Model FWG114P v2 3 The client sends an EAP response packet containing the identity to the authentication server The access point responds by enabling a port for passing only EAP packets from the client to an authentication server located on the wired side of the access point The access point blocks all other traffic such as HTTP DHCP and POP3 packets until the access point can verify the client s identity using an authentication server for example RADIUS 4 The authentication server uses a specific authentication algorithm to verify the client s identity This could be through the use of digital certificates or some other EAP authentication type 5 The authentication server will either send an accept or reject message to the access point 6 The access point sends an EAP success packet or reject packet to the client 7 Ifthe authentication server accepts the client then the access point will transition the client s port to an authorized state and forward additional traffic The important part to know at this point is that the software supporting the specific EAP type resides on the authentication server and within the operating system or application supplicant software on the client devices The access point acts as a pass through for 802 1x messages which means that you can specify any EAP type without needing to upgrade an 802 1x compliant access point As a result you can update the EAP authentication
47. Server DNS Address If your ISP does not automatically transmit DNS addresses to the firewall during login select Use These DNS Servers and enter the IP address of your ISP s Primary DNS Server If a Secondary DNS Server address is available enter it Note A DNS server is a host on the Internet that translates Internet names such as www netgear com to numeric IP addresses Typically your ISP transfers the IP address of one or two DNS servers to your firewall during login If the ISP does not transfer an address you must obtain it from the ISP and enter it manually here If you enter an address here you should reboot your PCs after configuring the firewall Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 19 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 7 Router s MAC Address This section determines the Ethernet MAC address that will be used by the firewall on the Internet port Some ISPs will register the Ethernet MAC address of the network interface card in your computer when your account is first opened They will then only accept traffic from the MAC address of that computer This feature allows your firewall to masquerade as that computer by cloning its MAC address To change the MAC address select Use This Computer s MAC Address The firewall will then capture and use the MAC address of the computer that you are now using You must be using th
48. TCP flood attack is detected the port used will be closed and no traffic will be able to use that port e Block UDP flood If checked when a UDP flood attack is detected all traffic from that IP address will be blocked e Block non standard packets If checked only known packet types will be accepted other packets will be blocked The known packet types are TCP UDP ICMP ESP and GRE Note that these are packet types not protocols Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 6 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Using a Schedule to Block or Allow Content or Traffic If you enabled content filtering in the Block Sites menu or if you defined an outbound rule to use a schedule you can set up a schedule for when blocking occurs or when access is restricted The router allows you to specify when blocking will be enforced by configuring the Schedule tab shown below Schedule O Use this schedule for rules Days Every Day Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Time of day use 24 hour clock All Day Start Time hour minute End Time hour minute Time Zone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US Canada Cl Adjust for daylight savings time Use this NTP Server o jo jo No Current time Wed 2003 07 23 09 49 59 Figure 6 8 Schedule menu To block keywords or Internet domains based on a schedule select Eve
49. VPN tunnel Or you can create a VPN policy which does not use an IKE policy but in which you manually enter all the authentication and key parameters Since the VPN policies use the IKE policies you define the IKE policy first The FWG114P v2 also allows you to manually input the authentication scheme and encryption key values In the case of manual key management there will not be any IKE policies In order to establish secure communication over the Internet with the remote site you need to configure matching VPN policies on both the local and remote FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Servers The outbound VPN policy on one end must match to the inbound VPN policy on other end and vice versa When the network traffic enters into the FWG114P v2 from the LAN network interface if there is no VPN policy found for a type of network traffic then that traffic passes through without any change However if the traffic is selected by a VPN policy then the IPSec authentication and encryption rules will be applied to it as defined in the VPN policy By default anew VPN policy is added with the least priority that is at the end of the VPN policy table Using Automatic Key Management The most common configuration scenarios will use IKE policies to automatically manage the authentication and encryption keys Based on the IKE policy some parameters for the VPN tunnel are generated automatically The IKE protocols perform negotiations between the t
50. Wired Network with Optional Wireless LAN 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control TCP IP WPA WPA enabled Ports Closed E enabled Access Point Until RADIUS Server ee wireless p using WE TE st i i re shared ke un hoa p or TCP IP Authentication example pn 802 1x Ports Opened Win Server After VeriSign Authenticated Figure E 3 WPA Overview IEFE 802 1x offers an effective framework for authenticating and controlling user traffic to a protected network as well as providing a vehicle for dynamically varying data encryption keys via EAP from a RADIUS server for example This framework enables using a central authentication server which employs mutual authentication so that a rogue wireless user does not join the network It is important to note that 802 1x does not provide the actual authentication mechanisms When using 802 1x the EAP type such as Transport Layer Security EAP TLS or EAP Tunneled Transport Layer Security EAP TTLS defines how the authentication takes place Note For environments with a Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS infrastructure WPA supports Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP For environments without a RADIUS infrastructure WPA supports the use of a pre shared key Together these technologies provide a framework for strong user authentication Windows XP implements 802 1x natively and several NETGEAR switch and wireless acce
51. Wireless USB 2 0 Adapter Model WG121 e ProSafe Indoor 5 dBi Omni directional Antenna Model ANT2405 e ProSafe Indoor Outdoor 18 dBi Patch Panel Directional Antenna Model ANT24D18 e ProSafe Indoor Outdoor 9 dBi Omni directional Antenna Model ANT2409 e Low loss Antenna Cables Package Contents The product package should contain the following items e ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e AC power adapter e Category 5 Cat 5 Ethernet cable e FWG114P Installation Guide 201 10301 01 e Resource CD for the ProSafe Wireless 802 11 g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P SW 10023 03 including This manual Application Notes and other helpful information e Registration and Warranty Card If any of the parts are incorrect missing or damaged contact your NETGEAR dealer Keep the carton including the original packing materials in case you need to return the router for repair The FWG114P v2 Front Panel The front panel of the FWG114P v2 contains the status LEDs Use the LEDs to verify various operations Viewed from left to right Table 2 1 describes the LEDs on the front of the router NETGEAR 22m ProSafe 802 119 Wireless Firewall Print Server WoDEL FWG114P m PWR om TEST Figure 2 1 FWG114P v2 Front Panel Introduction 2 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Ta
52. a mechanism must be in place for selecting and transmitting only the data traffic meant for the Internet The function of selecting and forwarding this data is performed by a router What is a Router A router is a device that forwards traffic between networks based on network layer information in the data and on routing tables maintained by the router In these routing tables a router builds up a logical picture of the overall network by gathering and exchanging information with other routers in the network Using this information the router chooses the best path for forwarding network traffic Routers vary in performance and scale number of routing protocols supported and types of physical WAN connection they support Networks Routing and Firewall Basics B 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Routing Information Protocol One of the protocols used by a router to build and maintain a picture of the network is the Routing Information Protocol RIP Using RIP routers periodically update one another and check for changes to add to the routing table The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server supports both the older RIP 1 and the newer RIP 2 protocols Among other improvements RIP 2 supports subnet and multicast protocols RIP is not required for most home applications IP Addresses and the Internet Because TCP IP networks are interconnected
53. access this device e Wireless Access Point Enable Wireless Access Point Enables the wireless radio When disabled there are no wireless communications through the FWG114P v2 Allow Broadcast of Name SSID The default setting is to enable SSID broadcast If you disable broadcast of the SSID only devices that have the correct SSID can connect Disabling SSID broadcast somewhat hampers the wireless network discovery feature of some products e Wireless Card Access List Lets you restrict wireless connections according to a list of Trusted PCs MAC addresses When the Trusted PCs Only radio button is selected the FWG114P v2 checks the MAC address of the wireless station and only allows connections to PCs identified on the trusted PCs list 4 4 Wireless Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 To restrict access based on MAC addresses click the Set up Access List button and update the MAC access control list e Security Options Disable No data encryption is used WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy Use WEP 64 or 128 bit data encryption WPA with Radius This version of WPA requires the use of a Radius server for authentication Each user Wireless Client must have a user login on the Radius Server normally done via a digital certificate Also this device must have a client login on the Radius server Data transmission
54. account and register your new IP address 1 Log in to the router at its default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with its default user name of admin default password of password or using whatever password and LAN address you have chosen for the router 2 From the Main Menu of the browser interface under Advanced click on Dynamic DNS Advanced Configuration 10 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 3 Access the website of one of the dynamic DNS service providers whose names appear in the Select Service Provider box and register for an account For example for dyndns org go to www dyndns org 4 Select the Use a dynamic DNS service check box 5 Select the name of your dynamic DNS Service Provider 6 Type the host name that your dynamic DNS service provider gave you The dynamic DNS service provider may call this the domain name If your URL is myName dyndns org then your host name is myName 7 Type the user name for your dynamic DNS account 8 Type the password or key for your dynamic DNS account 9 If your dynamic DNS provider allows the use of wildcards in resolving your URL you may select the Use wildcards check box to activate this feature For example the wildcard feature will cause yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org 10 Click Apply to save your configuration
55. address of 192 168 0 3 While the connection is being established the Connection Name field in this menu will say SA before the name of the connection When the connection is successful the SA will change to the yellow key symbol shown in the illustration above Viewing the FWG114P v2 VPN Status and Log Information Information on the status of the VPN client connection can be viewed by opening the FWG114P v2 VPN Status screen To view this screen click the VPN Status link on the FWG114P v2 main menu Virtual Private Networking 8 47 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The FWG114P v2 VPN Status screen for a successful connection is shown below VPN StatusiLog 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 2003 11 22 lt IPSec SA SPI 1 3693815379 2 3797946439 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 44 SENT OUT SECOND MESSAGE OF AGGR MODE 45 RECEIVED THIRD MESSAGE OF AGGR MODE 45 lt POLICY PNclient gt PAYLOADS HASH NOTIFY 45 AGGR MODE COMPLETED 245 45 IKE PHASE 1 ESTABLISHED IKE PHASE 2 from 64 175 249 42 START responder 45 RECEIVED FIRST MESSAGE OF QUICK MODE 45
56. adjust based on geographic requirements The purpose of 11d is to add features and restrictions to allow WLANs to operate within the rules of these countries Equipment manufacturers do not want to produce a wide variety of country specific products and users that travel do not want a bag full of country specific WLAN PC cards The outcome will be country specific firmware solutions Glossary 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 802 11e Standard 802 1 1e is a proposed IEEE standard to define quality of service QoS mechanisms for wireless gear that gives support to bandwidth sensitive applications such as voice and video 802 11g Standard Similar to 802 11b this physical layer standard provides a throughput of up to 54 Mbps It also operates in the 2 4 GHz frequency band but uses a different radio technology in order to boost overall bandwidth 802 111 This is the name of the IEEE Task Group dedicated to standardizing WLAN security The 802 111 Security has a frame work based on RSN Robust Security Mechanism RSN consists of two parts 1 The Data Privacy Mechanism and 2 Security Association Management The Data Privacy Mechanism supports two proposed schemes TKIP and AES TKIP Temporal Key Integrity is a short term solution that defines software patches to WEP to provide a minimally adequate level of data privacy AES or AES OCB Advanced Encryption S
57. connector A normal straight through UTP Ethernet cable follows the EI A568B standard wiring as described below in Table B 1 Networks Routing and Firewall Basics B 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table B 1 UTP Ethernet cable wiring straight through Pin Wire color Signal 1 Orange White Transmit Tx 2 Orange Transmit Tx 3 Green White Receive Rx 4 Blue 5 Blue White 6 Green Receive Rx 7 Brown White 8 Brown Category 5 Cable Quality Category 5 distributed cable that meets ANSI EIA TIA 568 A building wiring standards can be a maximum of 328 feet ft or 100 meters m in length divided as follows 20 ft 6 m between the hub and the patch panel if used 295 ft 90 m from the wiring closet to the wall outlet 10 ft 3 m from the wall outlet to the desktop device The patch panel and other connecting hardware must meet the requirements for 100 Mbps operation Category 5 Only 0 5 inch 1 5 cm of untwist in the wire pair is allowed at any termination point A twisted pair Ethernet network operating at 10 Mbits second 1OBASE T will often tolerate low quality cables but at 100 Mbits second LOBASE Tx the cable must be rated as Category 5 or Cat 5 by the Electronic Industry Association EIA This rating will be printed on the cable jacket A Category 5 cable will meet specified requirem
58. data across a global radio frequency band without the need for cables or wires Bluetooth is a frequency hopping technology in the 2 4 GHz frequency spectrum with a range of 30 feet and up to 11 Mbps raw data throughput Bridge A product that connects a local area network LAN to another local area network that uses the same protocol for example wireless Ethernet or token ring Wireless bridges are commonly used to link buildings in campuses Client or Client devices Any computer connected to a network that requests services files print capability from another member of the network Clients are end users Wi Fi client devices include PC Cards that slide into laptop computers mini PCI modules embedded in laptop computers and mobile computing devices as well as USB and PCI Glossary 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 ISA bus Wi Fi radios Client devices usually communicate with hub devices like access points and gateways Collision avoidance A network node characteristic for proactively detecting that it can transmit a signal without risking a collision thereby ensuring a more reliable connection Crossover cable A special cable used for networking two computers without the use of a hub Crossover cables may also be required for connecting a cable or DSL modem to a wireless gateway or access point Instead of the signals transferring in parall
59. data to be encrypted and then decrypted so it can be safely shared among members of a network WEP uses an encryption key that automatically encrypts outgoing wireless data On the receiving side the same encryption key enables the computer to automatically decrypt the information so it can be read Enhanced Data Encryption through TKIP To improve data encryption Wi Fi Protected Access utilizes its Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements including a per packet key mixing function a message integrity check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism Through these enhancements TKIP addresses all WEP known vulnerabilities Enterprise level User Authentication via 802 1x and EAP WEP has almost no user authentication mechanism To strengthen user authentication Wi Fi Protected Access implements 802 1x and the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP Together these implementations provide a framework for strong user authentication This framework utilizes a central authentication server such as RADIUS to authenticate each user on the network before they join it and also employs mutual authentication so that the wireless user doesn t accidentally join a rogue network that might steal its network credentials ESSID more commonly referred to as SSID Short Set Identifier The identifying name of an 802 11 wireless network
60. default address range of 192 168 0 x 1 Log in to the FVS318 on LAN A at its default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with its default user name of admin and password of password Click the VPN Wizard link in the main menu to display this screen Click Next to proceed Virtual Private Networking 8 15 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPN Wizard The Wizard sets most parameters to defaults as proposed by the YPN Consortium PNC and assumes a pre shared key greatly simplifies setup After creating the policies through VPN Wizard you can always update the parameters through VPN Settings link on the left menu Figure 8 5 VPN Wizard Start Screen 2 Fill in the Connection Name pre shared key and select the type of target end point and click Next to proceed VPN Wizard Step 1 of 3 Connection Name and Remote IP Type What is the new Connection Name yvhat is the pre shared key This WPN tunnel will Aremote VPN Gateway connect to C A remote VPN client single PC Back Next Cancel Figure 8 6 Connection Name and Remote IP Type 8 16 201 10301 02 May 2005 Virtual Private Networking Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 3 Fill in the IP Address or FQDN for the target VPN endpoint WAN connection and click Next VPN Wizard Step 2 of
61. designated private address range for use in private networks and should be suitable in most applications If your network has a requirement to use a different IP addressing scheme you can make those changes in this menu The LAN IP parameters are e IP Address This is the LAN IP address of the router e JP Subnet Mask This is the LAN Subnet Mask of the router Combined with the IP address the IP Subnet Mask allows a device to know which other addresses are local to it and which must be reached through a gateway or router e RIP Direction RIP Router Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction selection controls how the router sends and receives RIP packets Both is the default When set to Both or Out Only the router will broadcast its routing table periodically When set to Both or In Only it will incorporate the RIP information that it receives When set to None it will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received e RIP Version This controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the router sends It recognizes both formats when receiving By default this is set for RIP 1 RIP 1 is universally supported RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network setup RIP 2 carries more information RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting Note If you change the LAN IP addr
62. exchanged the IPSec SAs are ready to protect user data between the two VPN gateways 4 Data transfer Data is transferred between IPSec peers based on the IPSec parameters and keys stored in the SA database 5 IPSec tunnel termination IPSec SAs terminate through deletion or by timing out VPNC IKE Security Parameters It is important to remember that both gateways must have the identical parameters set for the process to work correctly The settings in these examples follow the examples given for Scenario 1 of the VPN Consortium VPNC IKE Phase Parameters The IKE Phase 1 parameters used Main mode TripleDES SHA 1 MODP group 1 Ppre shared secret of hr5xb841l6aa9r6 SA lifetime of 28800 seconds eight hours F 10 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPNC IKE Phase II Parameters The IKE Phase 2 parameters used in Scenario 1 are TripleDES SHA 1 ESP tunnel mode MODP group 1 Perfect forward secrecy for rekeying SA lifetime of 28800 seconds one hour Testing and Troubleshooting Once you have completed the VPN configuration steps you can use PCs located behind each of the gateways to ping various addresses on the LAN side of the other gateway You can troubleshoot connections using the VPN status and log details on the NETGEAR gateway to determine if IKE negotiation is
63. in lower case letters A login window opens as shown here D Please type your user name and password Site 192 168 0 1 Realm User Name fadmin Password waal I Save this password in your password list Cancel Figure 3 6 Login window Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 d After logging in to the router you will see the login result page es ProSafe 802 11g Wireless Firewall Print Server FWG114P Setup Wizard VPN Wizard Basic Settings What type of Internet Connection do you have Broadband No login Broadband with Login username password Serial Port Modem or ISDN Basic Settings Wireless Logs Block Sites Account Name If Required Rules Domain Name If Required Services Schedule NAT Network Address Translation Fwa114P TEE E mail Enable Disable Internet IP Address Get Dynamically From ISP Use Static IP Address CAs IP Address Certificates CRL VPN Status IKE Policies VPN Policies IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Domain Name Server DNS Address Get Automatically From ISP Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS Secondary DNS Router Status Attached Devices Settings Backup Set Password Diagnostics Router Upgrade Router s MAC Address Use Default Address Use This Computer s MAC Use This MAC
64. in current use E 14 Wireless Networking Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP WPA uses TKIP to provide important data encryption enhancements including a per packet key mixing function a message integrity check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism TKIP also provides for the following e The verification of the security configuration after the encryption keys are determined e The synchronized changing of the unicast encryption key for each frame e The determination of a unique starting unicast encryption key for each preshared key authentication Michael With 802 11 and WEP data integrity is provided by a 32 bit integrity check value ICV that is appended to the 802 11 payload and encrypted with WEP Although the ICV is encrypted you can use cryptanalysis to change bits in the encrypted payload and update the encrypted ICV without being detected by the receiver With WPA a method known as Michael specifies a new algorithm that calculates an 8 byte message integrity check MIC using the calculation facilities available on existing wireless devices The MIC is placed between the data portion of the IEEE 802 11 frame and the 4 byte ICV The MIC field is encrypted together with the frame data and the ICV Michael also provides repla
65. jum onder aaan a acoder ar he Appendix D Firewall Log Formats PUNT Ls icsc susan acest vied spaiaurtenion a T E SE EAER D 1 Field List E E E A ie nee Outbound me EEEE A AE E E AN E T A E ET D 1 ODDUN LOG iaie D 2 Se e E E A A E A ESAE E E NA A A D Romer opaa NON aiarra aar Na E L bea D 3 Other Connections and Traffic to iie ROULET semdesiaenenea einem na Boa Ala ECIN oran a a a Ee POEs EOE E ana O mG tas sone D 6 All Web Sites and News Groups Visited cccccccceessseceseeeeseseesseeessstesssseeesseeesseee D 6 System Admin Sessions sescsscsenn aa LAE Policy Administration LOG E EA bap E AE TE IE E E A T T A D 7 Appendix E Wireless Networking Basics Wireless Neiwoikng OYemie W ssuncnsaisinionnnnin ae E Infrastructure Mode pipni ei E E A Ad Hoc Mode Peer to Peer Workgroup TEE eh a Open Syster AUT NUCAUION caian na Eas obared key AUNE mC iann AAN aheaeual E 4 Overview of WEP Parameters neses Key Size A AE P PEA A AN PENA AE E E AN WEP Cantani Opllans ie fas E T TEE EANA A E N A E 7 Wireless Channels EE eadadedysscoiugunies tase ae yes E A eee WPA Wireless r er E AEE A Tere re terre tere T ret ree E 8 How Does WPA Compare to WEP Peadiinaeicc oid aa tiie saaapicnar ings soe eeuaaaeiel tatu aGE E 9 How Does WPA Compare to IEEE 802 111 oo ceceeccteeeeseeesteeessseeesteesesseee E10 What are the Key Features of WPA Security cccecsceeeeeeseereeteettetteeeees E10 WPA Authentication Enterp
66. lt DST_PORT gt lt DST_PORT gt lt ACTION gt lt DESCRIPTION gt lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt PKT_TYPE gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_IP gt lt DST_INF gt lt ACTION gt lt DESCRIPTION gt Wed 2003 07 30 17 43 28 IPSEC Packet Source 64 3 3 201 37180 WAN Destination 10 10 10 4 80 HTTP LAN Drop VPN Packet Wed 2003 07 30 18 44 50 IP Packet Type Field 321 Source 18 7 21 69 192 168 0 3 Drop Notes DESCRIPTION VPN Packet PKT_TYPE GRE AH ESP IP packet Type Field Num IPSEC ACTION Forward Drop Router Operation Operations that the router initiates are logged The format is lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EVENT gt Wed 2003 07 30 Wed 2003 07 30 Wed 2003 07 30 o gt 2 30 59 Log emailed 2 38 31 NETGEAR activated 2 42 01 NTP Reply Invalid w w The format is lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EVENT gt lt DST_IP gt lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EVENT gt lt SRC_IP gt Wed 2003 07 30 16 32 33 Send out NTP Request to 207 46 130 100 wed 2003 07 30 16 35 27 Receive NTP Reply from 207 46 130 100 Firewall Log Formats D 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Other Connections and Traffic to this Router The format is
67. major operations include e Network security capability determination This occurs at the 802 11 level and is communicated through WPA information elements in Beacon Probe Response and Re Association Requests Information in these elements includes the authentication method 802 1X or Pre shared key and the preferred cipher suite WEP TKIP or AES E 10 Wireless Networking Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The primary information conveyed in the Beacon frames is the authentication method and the cipher suite Possible authentication methods include 802 1X and Pre shared key Pre shared key is an authentication method that uses a statically configured pass phrase on both the stations and the access point This obviates the need for an authentication server which in many home and small office environments will not be available nor desirable Possible cipher suites include WEP TKIP and AES Advanced Encryption Standard We talk more about TKIP and AES when addressing data privacy below e Authentication EAP over 802 1X is used for authentication Mutual authentication is gained by choosing an EAP type supporting this feature and is required by WPA 802 1X port access control prevents full access to the network until authentication completes 802 1X EAPOL Key packets are used by WPA to distribute per session keys to those stations successfully a
68. modem This cable could be a standard straight through Ethernet cable or an Ethernet crossover cable 11 2 Troubleshooting 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Troubleshooting the Web Configuration Interface If you are unable to access the router s Web Configuration interface from a computer on your local network check the following e Check the Ethernet connection between the computer and the router as described in the previous section e Make sure your computer s IP address is on the same subnet as the router If you are using the recommended addressing scheme your computer s address should be in the range of 192 168 0 2 to 192 168 0 254 Note If your computer s IP address is shown as 169 254 x x Recent versions of Windows and MacOS will generate and assign an IP address if the computer cannot reach a DHCP server These auto generated addresses are in the range of 169 254 x x If your IP address is in this range check the connection from the computer to the router and reboot your computer e If your router s IP address has been changed and you do not know the current IP address clear the router s configuration to the factory defaults This will set the router s IP address to 192 168 0 1 This procedure is explained in Restoring the Default Configuration and Password on page 11 7 e Make sure your browser has Java JavaScript
69. over Ethernet PPPoE PPPoE is a protocol for connecting remote hosts to the Internet over a DSL connection by simulating a dial up connection This feature eliminates the need to run a login program such as Entersys or WinPOET on your computer e PPTP login support for European ISPs BigPond login for Telstra cable in Australia e Classical IP RFC 1577 Some Internet service providers in Europe for example use Classical IP in their ADSL services In such cases the firewall is able to use the Classical IP address from the ISP Introduction 2 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Easy Installation and Management You can install configure and operate the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 within minutes after connecting it to the network The following features simplify installation and management tasks e Automatic fail over connectivity through an analog or ISDN modem connected to the serial port If the broadband modem Internet connection fails after waiting for an amount of time you specify the FWG114P v2 can automatically establish a backup ISDN or dial up Internet connection via the serial port on the firewall e Browser based management Browser based configuration allows you to easily configure your router from almost any type of personal computer such as Windows Macintosh or Linux A user friendly Setup Wiz
70. receptive to drifters or was inhospitable War Driving War driving is the act of locating and possibly exploiting connections to wireless local area networks while driving around a city or elsewhere To do war driving you need a vehicle a computer which can be a laptop a wireless Ethernet card set to work in promiscuous mode and some kind of an antenna which can be mounted on top of or positioned inside the car Because a wireless LAN may have a range that extends beyond an office building an outside user may be able to intrude into the network obtain a free Internet connection and possibly gain access to company records and other resources Some people have made a sport out of war driving in part to demonstrate the ease with which wireless LANs can be compromised With an omnidirectional antenna and a geophysical positioning system GPS the war driver can systematically map the locations of 802 11b wireless access points WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy Basic wireless security provided by Wi Fi In some instances WEP may be all a home or small business user needs to protect wireless data WEP is available in 40 bit also called 64 bit or in 108 bit also called 128 bit encryption modes As 108 bit encryption provides a longer algorithm that takes longer to decode it can provide better security than basic 40 bit 64 bit encryption Wi Fi Wireless Fidelity Another name for IEEE 802 11b Products certified as Wi Fi are interoperab
71. replied to lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EVENT gt lt PKT_TYPE gt lt SRC_IP gt lt DST_IP gt lt SRC_PORT gt lt DST_PORT gt lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_INF gt lt ACTION gt lt DESCRIPTION gt lt DIRECTION gt lt SERVICE gt Outbound Log Log s date and time Event is that access the device or access other host via the device Packet type pass Firewall IP address in the packet Port in the packet Include LAN and WAN optional As Action List referenced A complement to the log optional Inbound and Outbound Firewall costumed service Outgoing packets that match the Firewall rules are logged Firewall Log Formats D 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The format is lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt PKT_TYPE gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_IP gt lt DST_INF gt lt ACTION gt lt DESCRIPTION gt Fri 2003 12 05 22 19 42 UDP Packet Source 172 31 12 233 138 WAN Destination 172 31 12 255 138 LAN Drop Inbound Default rule match Fri 2003 12 05 22 35 04 TCP Packet Source 172 31 12 156 34239 WAN Destination 192 168 0 10 21 FTP Control LAN Forward Inbound Rule 1 match Fri 2003 12 05 22 35 11 UDP Packet Source 172 31 12 200 138 WAN Destination 172 31 12 255 138 LAN Forward Inbound Rule 1 not match Notes SRC_INF WAN
72. specifically refer to IETF s RFC 2284 With 802 11 WEP all access points and client wireless adapters on a particular wireless LAN must use the same encryption key A major problem with the 802 11 standard is that the keys are cumbersome to change If you do not update the WEP keys often an unauthorized person with a sniffing tool can monitor your network for less than a day and decode the encrypted messages Products based on the 802 11 standard alone offer system administrators no effective method to update the keys For 802 11 WEP encryption is optional For WPA encryption using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP is required TKIP replaces WEP with a new encryption algorithm that is stronger than the WEP algorithm but that uses the calculation facilities present on existing wireless devices to perform encryption operations TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements including a per packet key mixing function a message integrity check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism Through these enhancements TKIP addresses all of known WEP vulnerabilities Wireless Networking Basics E 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 How Does WPA Compare to IEEE 802 11i WPA will be forward compatible with the IEEE 802 11i security specification currently under development WPA is a subset o
73. take advantage of the routing functions on the broadband WAN LAN and serial network interfaces Note If you configure the serial port of the FWG114P v2 as the primary Internet connection you will not be able to configure the other serial port options For instructions on configuring the serial port as the primary Internet connection please see How to Configure the Serial Port as the Primary Internet Connection on page 3 15 The FWG114P v2 provides these serial port configuration options Modem Use this option to configure the serial modem settings for any of the features below Auto Rollover Use this option to provide a backup connection for your broadband service If the broadband service you configured in the Basic Settings menu fails the FWG114P v2 will automatically connect to the Internet through the serial port However you will then be accessing the Internet at a slower speed than you would through your broadband service Dial in Dial in lets a single remote computer connect to the FWG114P v2 through the serial port to gain access to LAN resources or a remote access server LAN to LAN LAN to LAN enables direct communications between two FWG114P v2 wireless firewall print servers to Share resources on the two LANs Let users on one FWG114P v2 share the Internet connection of the other FWG114P v2 Let users on one FWG114P v2 connect to the Internet through the second FWG114P v2 in case the broadband co
74. the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P SW 10023 03 includes all the settings identified in this procedure Whenever importing policy settings you should first export any existing settings you may have configured to prevent the new imported settings from replacing an existing working configuration To import this policy use the Security Policy Editor File menu to select Import Policy and select the FWG114P v2 SPD file at D Software Policies where D is the drive letter of your CD ROM drive This procedure describes linking a remote PC and a LAN The LAN will connect to the Internet using an FWG114P v2 with a static IP address The PC can be directly connected to the Internet through dialup cable or DSL modem or other means and we will assume it has a dynamically assigned IP address 8 38 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 1 Install the Netgear VPN Client Software on the PC gt Note Before installing the Netgear VPN Client software be sure to turn off any virus protection or firewall software you may be running on your PC You may need to insert your Windows CD to complete the installation Reboot your PC after installing the client software 2 Configure the Connection Network Settings IN Security Policy Editor NETGEAR ProSafe VPN Client File Edit Option
75. the example do not use full TCP IP notation Interface Addressing This TechNote uses example addresses provided the VPN Consortium It is important to understand that you will be using addresses specific to the devices that you are attempting to connect via IPSec VPN 10 5 6 0 24 172 23 9 0 24 f VPNC Example Network Interface Addressing Gateway A Gateway B 14 15 16 17 22 23 24 25 i i mam P INTERNET Eeee WAN IP WANIP meei a LAN IP 10 5 6 1 172 23 9 1 Figure F 4 VPNC Example Network Interface Addressing It is also important to make sure the addresses do not overlap or conflict That is each set of addresses should be separate and distinct Virtual Private Networking F 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table 5 3 WAN Internet Public and LAN Internal Private Addressing Gateway LAN or WAN VPNC Example Address Gateway A LAN Private 10 5 6 1 Gateway A WAN Public 14 15 16 17 Gateway B LAN Private 22 23 24 25 Gateway B WAN Public 172 23 9 1 It will also be important to know the subnet mask of both gateway LAN Connections Table 5 4 Subnet Addressing Gateway LAN or WAN Interface Name Example Subnet Mask Gateway A LAN Private Subnet Mask A 255 255 255 0 Gateway B LAN Private Subnet Mask B 255 255 255 0 Firewalls It is important to understan
76. the rear panel as seen in the illustration FWG114P v2 Rear Panel on page 2 9 After you install the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server use the procedures below to customize any of the settings to better meet your networking needs FEATURE DEFAULT FACTORY SETTINGS SSID NETGEAR RF Channel 11 until the region is selected Access Point Enabled SSID broadcast Enabled Wireless Card Access List for Access Point Connections All wireless stations allowed WEP Security Disabled Authentication Type Open System 4 6 201 10301 02 May 2005 Wireless Configuration Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Before You Change the SSID and WEP Settings Take the following steps For a new wireless network print or copy this form and fill in the configuration parameters For an existing wireless network the person who set up or is responsible for the network will be able to provide this information Be sure to set the Regulatory Domain correctly as the first step e SSID The Service Set Identification SSID identifies the wireless local area network Wireless is the default FWG114P v2 SSID However you may customize it by using up to 32 alphanumeric characters Write your customized SSID on the line below Note The SSID in the wireless firewall print server is the SSID you configure in the wireless adapter card All wireless
77. the virtual private networking VPN features of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server VPN tunnels provide secure encrypted communications between your local network and a remote network or computer The FWG114P v2 supports 2 VPN tunnels Overview of FWG114P v2 Policy Based VPN Configuration The FWG114P v2 uses state of the art firewall and security technology to facilitate controlled and actively monitored VPN connectivity Since the FWG114P v2 strictly conforms to IETF standards it is interoperable with devices from major network equipment vendors Telecommuter with client software VPN tunnels encrypt data n 4 aP Computers Server Computers Figure 8 1 Secure access through FWG114P v2 VPN routers Virtual Private Networking 8 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Using Policies to Manage VPN Traffic You create policy definitions to manage VPN traffic on the FWG114P v2 There are two kinds of policies e IKE Policies Define the authentication scheme and automatically generate the encryption keys As an alternative option to further automate the process you can create an IKE policy which uses a trusted certificate authority to provide the authentication while the IKE policy still handles the encryption e VPN Policies Apply the IKE policy to specific traffic which requires a
78. type to such devices as token cards Smart Cards Kerberos one time passwords certificates and public key authentication or as newer types become available and your requirements for security change WPA Data Encryption Key Management With 802 1x the rekeying of unicast encryption keys is optional Additionally 802 11 and 802 1x provide no mechanism to change the global encryption key used for multicast and broadcast traffic With WPA rekeying of both unicast and global encryption keys is required For the unicast encryption key the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP changes the key for every frame and the change is synchronized between the wireless client and the wireless access point AP For the global encryption key WPA includes a facility the Information Element for the wireless AP to advertise the changed key to the connected wireless clients If configured to implement dynamic key exchange the 802 1x authentication server can return session keys to the access point along with the accept message The access point uses the session keys to build sign and encrypt an EAP key message that is sent to the client immediately after sending the success message The client can then use contents of the key message to define applicable encryption keys In typical 802 1x implementations the client can automatically change encryption keys as often as necessary to minimize the possibility of eavesdroppers having enough time to crack the key
79. typical 82 dBm typical 84 dBm typical 85 dBm typical 86 dBm typical 83 dBm typical 86 dBm typical 89 dBm typical 92 dBm typical Note For Europe the maximum transmit power does not exceed 15 dBm External detachable 5 dBi omnidirectional 40 bits also called 64 bits 128 bits WEP data encryption and WPA A 2 201 10301 02 May 2005 Technical Specifications Appendix B Networks Routing and Firewall Basics This appendix provides an overview of IP networks routing and firewalls Related Publications As you read this document you may be directed to various RFC documents for further information An RFC is a Request For Comment RFC published by the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF an open organization that defines the architecture and operation of the Internet The RFC documents outline and define the standard protocols and procedures for the Internet The documents are listed on the World Wide Web at www ietf org and are mirrored and indexed at many other sites worldwide Basic Router Concepts Large amounts of bandwidth can be provided easily and relatively inexpensively in a local area network LAN However providing high bandwidth between a local network and the Internet can be very expensive Because of this expense Internet access is usually provided by a slower speed wide area network WAN link such as a cable or DSL modem In order to make the best use of the slower WAN link
80. very expensive compared to Internet access technologies such as DSL or cable Because of this organizations are moving their networks to the Internet which is inexpensive and using IPSec to create these networks Virtual Private Networking F 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Remote Access Remote access enables telecommuters and mobile workers to access e mail and business applications A dial up connection to an organization s modem pool is one method of access for remote workers but is expensive because the organization must pay the associated long distance telephone and service costs Remote access VPNs greatly reduce expenses by enabling mobile workers to dial a local Internet connection and then set up a secure PSec based VPN communications to their organization e Extranets Extranets are secure connections between two or more organizations Common uses for extranets include supply chain management development partnerships and subscription services These undertakings can be difficult using legacy network technologies due to connection costs time delays and access availability PSec based VPNs are ideal for extranet connections PSec capable devices can be quickly and inexpensively installed on existing Internet connections What is IPSec and How Does It Work IPSec is an Internet Engineering Task Force IETF standard suite of protoco
81. visited If checked all visited websites and newsgroups are logged All Incoming TCP UDP ICMP traffic If checked all incoming TCP UDP ICMP connections and traffic is logged All Outgoing TCP UDP ICMP traffic If checked all outgoing TCP UDP ICMP connections and traffic is logged Other IP traffic If checked all other traffic IP packets which are not TCP UDP or ICMP is logged Router operation start up get time etc If checked Router operations such as starting up and getting the time from the Internet Time Server are logged Connection to the Web based interface of this Router If checked Administrator connections to the Web based interface will be logged Other connections and traffic to this Router If checked this will log traffic sent to this Router rather than through this Router to the Internet Allow duplicate log entries If checked then events or packets which fall within more than one 1 category above will have a log entry for each category in which they belong This will generate a large number of log entries If unchecked then events or packets will only be logged once Usually this should be left unchecked Logging programs are available for Windows Macintosh and Linux computers Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 6 17 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Enable one of these three options as r
82. working Common problems encountered in setting up VPNs include e Parameters may be configured differently on Gateway A vs Gateway B e Two LANs set up with similar or overlapping addressing schemes e So many required configuration parameters mean errors such as mistyped information or mismatched parameter selections on either side are more likely to happen Additional Reading e Building and Managing Virtual Private Networks Dave Kosiur Wiley amp Sons ISBN 0471295264 e Firewalls and Internet Security Repelling the Wily Hacker William R Cheswick and Steven M Bellovin Addison Wesley ISBN 0201633574 e VPNs A Beginners Guide John Mains McGraw Hill ISBN 0072191813 e FF98 Floyd S and Fall K Promoting the Use of End to End Congestion Control in the Internet IEEE ACM Transactions on Networking August 1999 Relevant RFCs listed numerically Virtual Private Networking F 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e RFC 791 Internet Protocol DARPA Internet Program Protocol Specification Information Sciences Institute USC September 1981 e RFC 1058 Routing Information Protocol C Hedrick Rutgers University June 1988 e RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 Juha Heinanen Telecom Finland July 1993 e RFC 2401 S Kent R Atkinson Security Architecture for the Internet Protocol RFC 2401
83. 000 Cause The router has not yet successfully reached a Network Time Server Check that your Internet access settings are configured correctly If you have just completed configuring the router wait at least five minutes and check the date and time again e Time is off by one hour Cause The router does not automatically sense Daylight Savings Time In the E Mail menu check or uncheck the box marked Adjust for Daylight Savings Time Troubleshooting 11 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 11 8 Troubleshooting 201 10301 02 May 2005 Appendix A Technical Specifications This appendix provides technical specifications for the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Network Protocol and Standards Compatibility Data and Routing Protocols VPN Protocols Tunnels Power Adapter North America United Kingdom Australia Europe Japan All regions output Physical Specifications Dimensions Weight Environmental Specifications Operating temperature Operating humidity TCP IP RIP 1 RIP 2 DHCP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IPSec SHA 1 MDS DES 3DES ESP DH1 DH2 2 IPSec Tunnels 120V 60 Hz input 240V 50 Hz input 230V 50 Hz input 100V 50 60 Hz input 12 V DC 1 2 A output 18W maximum H 32x L 188 x W 124mm 1 25 x 7 4 x 4 9 in 0 64 kg 1 4 1b 0 to 40 C
84. 0301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 7 Click Apply to save your changes gt Note If you are configuring the FWG114P v2 from a wireless computer and you lt change the wireless firewall print server s SSID channel or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you click on Apply You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the FWG114P v2 s new settings 8 Configure and test your PCs for wireless connectivity Program the wireless adapter of your PCs to have the same SSID that you configured in the FWGI114P v2 Check that they have a wireless link and are able to obtain an IP address by DHCP from the wireless firewall print server Once your PCs have basic wireless connectivity to the wireless firewall print server then you can configure the advanced options and wireless security functions How to Restrict Wireless Access by MAC Address To restrict access based on MAC addresses follow these steps 1 Log in at the default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with the default user name of admin and default password of password 2 Click Wireless in the main menu of the FWG114P v2 From the Wireless Settings menu click Setup Access List Wireless Station Access List Wireless Station Access Setup I Turn Access Control On Available Wireless Stations MAC Address Device N
85. 111 00000000 255 255 255 0 Equals 11000000 10101000 10101010 00000000 192 168 170 0 As a shorter alternative to dotted decimal notation the netmask may also be expressed in terms of the number of ones from the left This number is appended to the IP address following a backward slash as n In the example the address could be written as 192 168 170 237 24 indicating that the netmask is 24 ones followed by 8 zeros Subnet Addressing By looking at the addressing structures you can see that even with a Class C address there are a large number of hosts per network Such a structure is an inefficient use of addresses if each end of a routed link requires a different network number It is unlikely that the smaller office LANs would have that many devices You can resolve this problem by using a technique known as subnet addressing B 4 Networks Routing and Firewall Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Subnet addressing allows us to split one IP network address into smaller multiple physical networks known as subnetworks Some of the node numbers are used as a subnet number instead A Class B address gives us 16 bits of node numbers translating to 64 000 nodes Most organizations do not use 64 000 nodes so there are free bits that can be reassigned Subnet addressing makes use of those bits that are free as shown below Class B
86. 114P v2 Wireless Network Name SSID The SSID is also known as the wireless network name Enter a value of up to 32 alphanumeric characters In a setting where there is more than one wireless network different wireless network names provide a means for separating the traffic Any device you want to participate in the 802 11b g wireless network will need to use this SSID for that network The FWG114P v2 default SSID is NETGEAR Region This field identifies the region where the FWG114P v2 can be used It may not be legal to operate the wireless features of the wireless firewall print server in a region other than one of those identified in this field Unless you select a region you will only be able to use Channel 11 Channel This field determines which operating frequency will be used It should not be necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point For more information on the wireless channel frequencies please refer to Wireless Channels on page E 7 Mode Select the desired wireless mode The options are e g amp b Both 802 11g and 802 11b wireless stations can be used e g only Only 802 11g wireless stations can be used e b only All 802 11b wireless stations can be used 802 11 g wireless stations can still be used if they can operate in 802 11b mode The default is g amp b which allows both 802 11g and 802 11b wireless stations to
87. 114P v2 OR Configure your router to spoof your computer s MAC address This can be done in the Basic Settings menu Refer to Manually Configuring Your Internet Connection on page 3 18 If your router can obtain an IP address but your computer is unable to load any Web pages from the Internet e Your computer may not recognize any DNS server addresses A DNS server is a host on the Internet that translates Internet names such as www addresses to numeric IP addresses Typically your ISP will provide the addresses of one or two DNS servers for your use Alternatively you may configure your computer manually with DNS addresses as explained in your operating system documentation e Your computer may not have the router configured as its TCP IP gateway If your computer obtains its information from the router by DHCP reboot the computer and verify the gateway address Troubleshooting a TCP IP Network Using a Ping Utility Most TCP IP terminal devices and routers contain a ping utility that sends an echo request packet to the designated device The device then responds with an echo reply Troubleshooting a TCP IP network is made very easy by using the ping utility in your computer or workstation Testing the LAN Path to Your Router You can ping the router from your computer to verify that the LAN path to your router is set up correctly To ping the router from a computer running Windows 95 or later 1 From the Windows t
88. 19 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 These settings normally do not need to be changed WMM support WMM Wireless Multimedia is a subset of the 802 11e standard WMM allows wireless traffic to have a range of priorities depending on the kind of data Time dependent information like video or audio will have a higher priority than normal traffic For WMM to function correctly wireless clients must also support WMM The default is Disable RTS Threshold Request to Send Threshold The packet size that is used to determine if it should use the CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection mechanism or the CSMA CA define the mechanism for packet transmission With the CSMA CD transmission mechanism the transmitting station sends out the actual packet as soon as it has waited for the silence period With the CSMA CA transmission mechanism the transmitting station sends out an RTS packet to the receiving station and waits for the receiving station to send back a CTS Clear to Send packet before sending the actual packet data Fragmentation Length This is the maximum packet size used for fragmentation Packets larger than the size programmed in this field will be fragmented The Fragment Threshold value must be larger than the RTS Threshold value Beacon Interval Specifies the data beacon rate between 20 and 1000 DTIM The Delivery Traffic Indication Message Specifies the data beacon rate between 1 and 255
89. 2 17 16 04 TCP Packet Source 66 223 47 219 80 HTTP WAN Destination 67 122 112 234 3722 LAN Drop First TCP Packet not SYN S Refresh Clear Log Send Log Include in Log M Known DoS attacks and Port Scans M Attempted access to blocked sites O All Websites and news groups visited O All Incoming TCP UDP ICMP traffic CO All Outgoing TCP UDPIICMP traffic C other IP traffic Router operation start up get time etc C Connections to the Web based interface of this Router o E Other connections and traffic to this Router Allow duplicate log entries C Enable Syslog Syslog server IP address 0 jo 0 20 Figure 6 10 Logs menu See Appendix D Firewall Log Formats for a full explanation of log entry formats 6 16 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Log action buttons are described in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Log action buttons Field Description Refresh Refreshes the log screen Clear Log Clears the log entries Send Log E mails the log immediately What to Include in the Event Log Use these checkboxes to determine which events are included in the log Checking all options will increase the size of the log so it is good practice to disable any events which are not really required All Websites and news groups
90. AN port of the router If no address is shown the router cannot connect to the Internet This field if the WAN port DHCP settings are dynamic or static This field displays the IP Subnet Mask being used by the Internet WAN port of the router Identifies the IP address of the DNS server s The Media Access Control address being used by the LAN port of the router The IP address being used by the Local LAN port of the router The default is 192 168 0 1 Identifies if the router s built in DHCP server is active for the LAN attached devices The IP Subnet Mask being used by the Local LAN port of the router The default is 255 255 255 0 Wireless Port Name SSID Region Channel Frequency Mode Wireless AP Broadcast Name This field displays the wireless network name SSID being used by the wireless port of the router The default is Wireless This field displays the MAC address being used by the wireless port of the router Identifies the channel the wireless port is using See Wireless Channels on page E 7 for the frequencies used on each channel Identifies if the channel the wireless port is set for 802 11b 802 11g or both Identifies if the wireless access point is on or off Identifies if the Name SSID is being broadcast Serial Port Status The status of the serial port Click the Details button to view the Serial Port Log Port Status Physical Link PPP Link PPP IP
91. Address eny cance Test Modem Auto Rollover Dial in LAN to LAN WAN Setup Dynamic DNS LAN IP Setup Remote Management Static Routes Wireless Setting UPnP Logout Figure 3 7 Login Result page 00 0 bS lb ea ct 3 8 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 4 RUNTHE SETUP VWZARD TO CONNECT TO THE INTERNET we Will you be using NAT Network Address Translation or Classical Routing natT O Classical Routing Next NAT is the default mode and should be chosen unless you are using valid IP addresses for all devices on your network NAT allows sharing of a single valid IP address among a range of private IP addresses Figure 3 8 Setup Wizard a You are now connected to the router If you do not see the menu above click the Setup Wizard link on the upper left of the main menu Choose NAT or Classical Routing Typically NAT is used NAT automatically assigns private IP addresses 192 168 0 x to LAN connected devices Classical routing lets you directly manage the IP addresses the FWG114P v2 uses Note If you choose not to use NAT each computer on the LAN connected to the FWG114P v2 must have a valid public IP address in the same subnet as the Wan port of the FWG114P v2 For more information on NAT please see Single IP Address Operation Using NAT on page B 7
92. Address Phone Line Speed and Serial Line Speed Maintenance 9 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table 9 1 Status Fields Field Description Modem The status of the modem port Dial In The status of the Dial In port Internet Access The status of the serial Internet connection Lan to LAN The status of the serial LAN to LAN connection Click WAN Status to display the WAN connection status Connection Time 00 00 00 Connection Method DynamiclP IP Address 0 0 0 0 Network Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Figure 9 2 Connection Status screen This screen shows the following statistics Table 9 1 Connection Status Fields Field Description Connection Time The length of time the router has been connected to your Internet service provider s network Connection Method The method used to obtain an IP address from your Internet service provider IP Address The WAN Internet IP Address assigned to the router Network Mask The WAN Internet Subnet Mask assigned to the router Default Gateway The WAN Internet default gateway the router communicates with 9 4 Maintenance 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Log action buttons are described in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Connecti
93. Association SA management Encapsulating Security Payload ESP ESP provides authentication integrity and confidentiality which protect against data tampering and most importantly provides message content protection IPSec provides an open framework for implementing industry standard algorithms such as SHA and MDS The algorithms IPSec uses produce a unique and unforgeable identifier for each packet which is a data equivalent of a fingerprint This fingerprint allows the device to determine if a packet has been tampered with Furthermore packets that are not authenticated are discarded and not delivered to the intended receiver ESP also provides all encryption services in IPSec Encryption translates a readable message into an unreadable format to hide the message content The opposite process called decryption translates the message content from an unreadable format to a readable message Encryption decryption allows only the sender and the authorized receiver to read the data In addition ESP has an option to perform authentication called ESP authentication Using ESP authentication ESP provides authentication and integrity for the payload and not for the IP header Original Packet Packet with IPSec Encapsulating Security Payload ESP ESP ESP Encrypted Authenticated Figure F 1 Original packet and packet with IPSec Encapsulated Security Payload Virtual Private Networking F 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Refer
94. C HP Loret SP SMP PosiScri HP Lasewet wd ea 5P SMP Print to the folowing poit 1 object s selec Anoa Delete Poit Print using the following driver HP LaserJet SP SMP PostScript z New Durer Capture Printer Part End Capture Timeout settings Not selected f 5 seconds Transmission gety 45 seconds Spool Settings Port Settings cet coy Figure 7 3 Windows Printer Properties h Click the Add Port button On the resulting screen select Other then select the NETGEAR Print Server Port as the port to add i Click OK to see the Print Port Configuration screen j Click the Browse Device button select the firewall and click OK 7 14 Print Server 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Print Port Configuration k Click OK to return to the Printers folders and right click on the new printer Make sure that the Work Offline option is NOT checked 1 From the printer Properties page General tab print a test page to confirm that the settings work m The new printer icon should no longer be grayed out and the printer is ready for use Print Server 7 15 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 7 16 Print Server 201 10301 02 May 2005 Chapter 8 Virtual Private Networking This chapter describes how to use
95. Detection A method of managing traffic and reducing noise on an Ethernet network A network device transmits data after detecting that a channel is available However if two devices transmit data simultaneously the sending devices detect a collision and retransmit after a random time delay DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A utility that enables a server to dynamically assign IP addresses from a predefined list and limit their time of use so that they can be reassigned Without DHCP an IT Manager would have to manually enter in all the IP addresses of all the computers on the network When DHCP is used whenever a computer logs onto the network it automatically gets an IP address assigned to it Diversity antenna A type of antenna system that uses two antennas to maximize reception and transmission quality and reduce interference 4 Glossary 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 DNS Domain Name System A program that translates URLs to IP addresses by accessing a database maintained on a collection of Internet servers The program works behind the scenes to facilitate surfing the Web with alpha versus numeric addresses A DNS server converts a name like mywebsite com to a series of numbers like 107 22 55 26 Every website has its own specific IP address on the Internet Encryption Key An alphanumeric letters and or numbers series that enables
96. FWG114P v2 5 Configure the Connection Security Policy In this step you will provide the authentication IKE Phase 1 settings and the key exchange Phase 2 settings The setting choices in this procedure follow the VPNC guidelines CEES a Nea new E a My Connections 78 Gy eas Authentication Method and Algorithms L Security Policy Authentication Method E Authentication Phase 1 Pre SharedKey D Key Exchange Phase 2 Encryption and Data Integrity Algorithms A Proposal 1 Qs Other Connections Encrypt Alg Triple DES Z Hash Alg SHA 1 x Seconds SA Life Unspecified v Key Group Diffie Hellman Group 2 Figure 8 31 Connection Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 a Configure the Authentication Phase 1 Settings e Expand the Security Policy heading then expand the Authentication Phase 1 heading and click on Proposal 1 e For this example ensure that the following settings are configured Inthe Encrypt Alg menu select Triple DES Inthe Hash Alg select SHA 1 Inthe SA Life select Unspecified Inthe Key Group menu select Diffie Hellman Group 2 8 42 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 My Connections IPSec Protocols z 7 F FWG114P econds ytes G My Identity SA Life Unspecified i a Security Policy c amp Authentication Phase 1 ompress
97. IKE Policies Policy Tabla e name mode Local io RemoteiD Ener auth DH 6 1 Fvg31e Main 22 23 24 25 netuearcyndns oro 30ES ms Group 1 768 81 Figure G 7 NETGEAR FVS328 IKE Policies Post Configuration The FVS318 IKE Policy is now displayed in the IKE Policies page 4 Click the VPN Policies link under the VPN category link on the left side of the Settings management GUI This will take you to the VPN Policies Menu page Click Add Auto Policy This will open a new screen titled VPN Auto Policy G 6 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPN Auto Policy General Policy Name 10316 IKE policy FY5318 z Remote VPN Endpoint Address Type IP Address SS Address Data 4 15 1617 SA Life Time foo Seconds gt Kybtes M IPSec PFS PFS Key Group Group 2 1024 Bi gt Traffic Selector Local IP Subnet address Start IP address 172 23 D Finish IP address o fo fo p Subnetmask 255 25s 255 fo Figure G 8 NETGEAR FVS328 VPN Auto Policy part 1 Enter a unique name to identify this policy This name is not supplied to the remote VPN endpoint In our example we have used to318 as the Policy Name In the Policy Name field type to318 From the IKE policy drop down box select the IKE Policy that was
98. IME gt lt PKT_TYPE gt lt SRC_IP gt lt DST_IP gt lt ACTION gt Wed 2003 07 30 17 45 17 TCP Packet Malformed Length 896 Sourc 64 3 3 201 Destination 10 10 10 4 Drop Wed 2003 07 30 17 45 17 TCP Packet Malformed Length 1000 Sourc 64 3 3 201 Destination 10 10 10 4 Forward Notes PKT_TYPE TCP UDP ICMP Proto Number Firewall Log Formats 201 10301 02 May 2005 D 5 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Access Block Site If keyword blocking is enabled and a keyword is specified attempts to access a site whose URL contains a specified keyword are logged The format is lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EVENT gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_IP gt lt DST_INF gt lt ACTION gt Fri 2003 12 05 23 01 47 Attempt to access blocked sites Source 192 168 0 10 LAN Destination www google com WAN Drop otes EVENT Attempt to access blocked sites SRC_INF LAN DST_INF WAN All Web Sites and News Groups Visited All Web sites and News groups that you visit are logged The format is lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EVENT gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_INF gt lt DST_IP gt lt DST_INF gt lt ACTION gt Pra 2003 12 05 23303249 Access sit Source 192 168 0 10 LAN Destination euro allyes com WAN Forward otes EVENT Attempt to access block
99. ISP Note If an ISP technician configured your computer during the installation of a Ce broadband modem or if you configured it using instructions provided by your ISP you may need to copy the current configuration information for use in the configuration of your firewall Write down this information before reconfiguring your computers Refer to Obtaining ISP Configuration Information for Windows Computers on page C 10 or Obtaining ISP Configuration Information for Macintosh Computers on page C 11 for further information Preparing Your Computers for TCP IP Networking Computers access the Internet using a protocol called TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Each computer on your network must have TCP IP installed and selected as its networking protocol If a Network Interface Card NIC is already installed in your PC then TCP IP is probably already installed as well Most operating systems include the software components you need for networking with TCP IP e Windows 95 or later includes the software components for establishing a TCP IP network e Windows 3 1 does not include a TCP IP component You need to purchase a third party TCP IP application package such as NetManage Chameleon e Macintosh Operating System 7 or later includes the software components for establishing a TCP IP network e All versions of UNIX or Linux include TCP IP components Follow the instructions p
100. Identity Data field NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 H 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 IKE SA Parameters Encryption Algorithm DES Authentication Algorithm MDs z Authentication Method Pre shared Key hr5xb6 4164 a3 6 C RSA Signature requires Certificate Diffle Hellman DH Group Group 1 768 Bit SA Life Time f2800 secs Back Cancel Figure H 7 NETGEAR FVS328 IKE Policy Configuration Part 2 From the Encryption Algorithm drop down box select 3DES From the Authentication Algorithm drop down box select MD5 From the Authentication Method radio button select Pre shared Key In the Pre Shared Key field type hr5xb84l6aa9r6 You must make sure the key is the same for both gateways From the Diffie Hellman DH Group drop down box select Group 1 768 Bit Inthe SA Life Time field type 28800 3 Click Apply This will bring you back to the IKE Policies Menu IKE Policies Policy Tablo Name moae LocalID Remote ID Encr aun DH i Fvgate Main 22 23 24 25 netgeardyndns ory 3DES MDS Group 1 768 Bit Add Move Delete Figure H 8 NETGEAR FWG114P v2 IKE Policies Post Configuration The FVS318 IKE Policy is now displayed in the IKE Policies page 4 Click the VPN Policies link under the VPN category on th
101. Internet If you normally log in to your Internet account by running a program such as WinPOET or EnterNet then your account uses PPP over Ethernet PPPoE When you configure your router you will need to enter your login name and password in the router s configuration menus After your network and firewall are configured the firewall will perform the login task when needed and you will no longer need to run the login program from your PC It is not necessary to uninstall the login program What Is Your Configuration Information More and more ISPs are dynamically assigning configuration information However if your ISP does not dynamically assign configuration information but instead uses fixed configurations your ISP should have given you the following basic information for your account Preparing Your Network C 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e An IP address and subnet mask e A gateway IP address which is the address of the ISP s router e One or more domain name server DNS IP addresses e Host name and domain suffix For example your account s full server names may look like this mail xxx yyy com In this example the domain suffix is xxx yyy com If any of these items are dynamically supplied by the ISP your firewall automatically acquires them If an ISP technician configured your PC during the installation of the broadband
102. KMP OAK QM HASH SA NON KE ID 2x 31 55 724 My Connections FVL328 RECEIVED lt lt lt ISAKMP OAK QM HASH SA NON KE ID 2x 55 734 My Connections F L328 Filter entry 3 SECURE 192 168 000 003 255 255 255 2565 192 168 000 000 255 255 255 000 066 120 188 153 added 31 55 734 My Connections FVL328 SENDING gt gt gt gt ISAKMP OAK QM HASH 55 824 My Connections FVL328 Loading IPSec SA Message ID 20435120 OUTBOUND SPI E26620C5 INBOUND SPI B5SEAF323 31 55 824 Figure 8 34 Log Viewer screen 8 46 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 A sample Connection Monitor screen for a different connection is shown below N Connection Monitor NETGEAR ProSafe VPN Client Global Statistics Non Secured Packets 35215 Secured Packets 0 Dropped Packets 3 Secured Data KBytes 0 i C Connection Name Local Address Local Subnet Remote Address Remote Modifier GW Address Protocol Local Port Rem Port Cz My Connectio 192 168 0 3 255 255 255 255 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 66 120 188 153 ALL ALL ALL Figure 8 35 Connection Monitor screen In this example the following connection options apply e The FWG114P v2 has a public IP WAN address of 66 120 188 153 e The FWG114P v2 has a LAN IP address of 192 168 0 1 e The VPN client PC is behind a home NAT router and has a dynamically assigned
103. Logs and Alerts In order to receive logs and alerts by e mail you must provide your e mail information in the E Mail subheading Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 6 13 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 E mail Tum e mail notification on Send alerts and logs by e mail Send to this E mail Address Outgoing Mail Server o My Mail Server requires authentication User Name Password Send E Mail alerts immediately M Ifa DoS attack is detected E ifa Port Scan is detected If someone attempts to access a blocked site Send logs according to this schedule Hourly v Day Time a m p m Figure 6 9 E mail menu e Turn e mail notification on Select this check box if you want to receive e mail logs and alerts from the router e Send alerts and logs by e mail If you enable e mail notification these boxes cannot be blank Enter the name or IP address of your ISP s outgoing SMTP mail server such as mail myISP com You may be able to find this information in the configuration menu of your e mail program Enter the e mail address to which logs and alerts will be sent This e mail address will also be used as the From address If you leave this box blank log and alert messages will not be sent via e mail Check My Mail Server requires authentication if you need to log in to your SMTP server in order to send e mail
104. MHz 2454 5 MHz 8 2447 MHz 2434 5 MHz 2459 5 MHz 9 2452 MHz 2439 5 MHz 2464 5 MHz 10 2457 MHz 2444 5 MHz 2469 5 MHz 11 2462 MHz 2449 5 MHz 2474 5 MHz 12 2467 MHz 2454 5 MHz 2479 5 MHz 13 2472 MHz 2459 5 MHz 2484 5 MHz Note The available channels supported by the wireless products in various countries are different For example Channels 1 to 11 are supported in the U S and Canada and Channels 1 to 13 are supported in Europe and Australia The preferred channel separation between the channels in neighboring wireless networks is 25 MHz 5 channels This means that you can apply up to three different channels within your wireless network There are only 11 usable wireless channels in the United States It is recommended that you start using channel 1 and grow to use channel 6 and 11 when necessary as these three channels do not overlap WPA Wireless Security Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a specification of standards based interoperable security enhancements that increase the level of data protection and access control for existing and future wireless LAN systems The IEEE introduced the WEP as an optional security measure to secure 802 11b Wi Fi WLANs but inherent weaknesses in the standard soon became obvious In response to this situation the Wi Fi Alliance announced a new security architecture in October 2002 that remedies the shortcomings of WEP This standard formerly known as Safe Secure Network
105. Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Changes to Wireless Access Points Wireless access points must have their firmware updated to support the following e The new WPA information element To advertise their support of WPA wireless APs send the beacon frame with a new 802 11 WPA information element that contains the wireless AP s security configuration encryption algorithms and wireless security configuration information e The WPA two phase authentication Open system then 802 1x EAP with RADIUS or preshared key TKIP e Michael e AES optional To upgrade your wireless access points to support WPA obtain a WPA firmware update from your wireless AP vendor and upload it to your wireless AP Changes to Wireless Network Adapters Wireless networking software in the adapter and possibly in the OS or client application must be updated to support the following e The new WPA information element Wireless clients must be able to process the WPA information element and respond with a specific security configuration e The WPA two phase authentication Open system then 802 1x supplicant EAP or preshared key e TKIP e Michael e AES optional To upgrade your wireless network adapters to support WPA obtain a WPA update from your wireless network adapter vendor and update the wireless network adapter driver For Windows wireless clients you must obtain an updated network adapter dr
106. N Subnet Mask of Gateway B 255 255 255 0 in our example in the Remote LAN IP Subnetmask field Type the WAN IP address 22 23 24 25 in our example of Gateway B in the Remote WAN IP or FQDN field Secure Association Perfect Forward Secrecy Encryption Protocol PreShared Key Key Life IKE Life Time Main Mode Enabled 3DES v hr5xb8416aa9r6 3600 28800 v Disabled Seconds Seconds Figure G 4 Figure 4 NETGEAR FVS318 VPN Settings part 2 Main Mode From the Secure Association drop down box select Main Mode Next to Perfect Forward Secrecy select the Enabled radio button From the Encryption Protocol drop down box select 3DES In the PreShared Key box type a unique text string to be used as the shared key between Gateway A and Gateway B In this example we used hr5xb84l6aa9r6 You must make sure the key is the same for both gateways Inthe Key Life box enter in 3600 seconds Inthe IKE Life Time enter 28800 seconds Check the NETBIOS Enable box if you wish to pass NetBIOS traffic over the VPN tunnel allowing functions such as Microsoft Network Neighborhood browsing 3 Click the Apply button in the lower center of the screen to save all changes and return to the VPN Settings screen 4 When the screen returns to the VPN Settings make sure the Enable check box is selected G 4 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 201 10301 02
107. Port Name is automatically filled in Click Next to proceed c Inthe Device Type section of the Additional Port Information Required screen select Custom d In the Custom selection click Settings e The Port Settings tab page opens In the Protocol section select the LPR radio button and enter FWG114P as the Queue Name in the LPR Settings section Click OK to close this tab page Click Next to proceed The Add Printer Wizard will now prompt you to install the software for the printer you attached to the FWG114P v2 Welcome to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You use this wizard to add a port for a network printer Before continuing be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Next Cancel Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Printer Name or IP Address 192 168 0 1 Port Name IP_192 168 0 1 Add Port Screen Device Type Custom Additional Port Information Required Port Settings Port Name IP_192 168 0 1 Printer Name or IP Address 192 168 0 1 Protocol Ofaw Raw Settings LPR Settings Queue Name FWG114P SNMP Status Enabled Cancel Additional Port Information Required Print Server 7 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Install Printer Software The manufacturer and mode
108. Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPNC Scenario 1 Gateway to Gateway with Preshared Secrets The following is a typical gateway to gateway VPN that uses a preshared secret for authentication 10 5 6 0 24 172 23 9 0 24 J Gateway A Gateway B 10 5 6 1 14 15 16 17 22 23 24 25 172 23 9 1 Figure 8 10 VPN Consortium Scenario 1 Gateway A connects the internal LAN 10 5 6 0 24 to the Internet Gateway A s LAN interface has the address 10 5 6 1 and its WAN Internet interface has the address 14 15 16 17 Gateway B connects the internal LAN 172 23 9 0 24 to the Internet Gateway B s WAN Internet interface has the address 22 23 24 25 Gateway B s LAN interface address 172 23 9 1 can be used for testing IPsec but is not needed for configuring Gateway A The IKE Phase 1 parameters used in Scenario 1 are e Main mode e TripleDES e SHA 1 e MODP group 2 1024 bits e pre shared secret of hr5xb8416aa9r6 e SA lifetime of 28800 seconds eight hours with no kbytes rekeying The IKE Phase 2 parameters used in Scenario 1 are e TripleDES e SHA 1 e ESP tunnel mode e MODP group 2 1024 bits e Perfect forward secrecy for rekeying e SA lifetime of 3600 seconds one hour with no kbytes rekeying e Selectors for all IP protocols all ports between 10 5 6 0 24 and 172 23 9 0 24 using IPv4 subnets Virtual Private Networ
109. Remember that allowing inbound services opens holes in your FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server Only enable those ports that are necessary for your network Following are two application examples of inbound rules Example Port Forwarding to a Local Public Web Server If you host a public Web server on your local network you can define a rule to allow inbound Web HTTP requests from any outside IP address to the IP address of your Web server any time of day Inbound Services Service HTTP TCP 80 Action et _ _ Send to LAN Server fisz fuss fo WAN Users Any z start E finish at 1 a Never Back Cancel Figure 6 3 Rule example A Local Public Web Server Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 6 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 This rule is shown in Figure 6 3 Example Port Forwarding for Videoconferencing If you want to allow incoming videoconferencing to be initiated from a restricted range of outside IP addresses such as from a branch office you can create an inbound rule In the example shown in Figure 6 4 CU SeeMe is a predefined service and its connections are allowed only from a specified range of external IP addresses In this case we have also specified logging of any incoming CU SeeMe requests that do not match the allowed parameters Inbound Services Service CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 v Action
110. Right click any printer in the Printers folder and select Properties b Highlight the port you want to delete c Use the Delete Port button to delete the port This button is on either the Details or Ports tab depending on your version of Windows e If you change the printer attached to the FWG114P v2 run the Add Port program again and select the new printer The options for the Print Port Driver are accessed via the Windows Port Settings button Use Start gt Settings gt Printers to open the Printers folder then right click the Printer and select Properties The Port Settings button is on either the Details or Port tab depending on your version of Windows An example screen is shown below 7 10 Print Server 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Print Port Configuration __ Bronse Device psst Figure 7 1 Print Port Configuration menu Items shown on this screen are as follows e Port If desired click Browse Device to select a different device The Select Device Port button supports multi port models but the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server is a single port print server The Port Name is shown in the Printer s Properties e Banner Check this option to print a banner page before each print job The User Name you enter will be printed on the banner page If using a PostScript Printer check the PostScript box e Retry In
111. S VPN creates a private encrypted tunnel from the end user s computer through the local wireless network through the Internet all the way to the corporate servers and database War Chalking The act of making chalk marks on outdoor surfaces walls sidewalks buildings sign posts trees to indicate the existence of an open wireless network connection usually offering an Internet connection so that others can benefit from the free wireless access The open connections typically come from the access points of wireless networks located within buildings to serve enterprises The chalk symbols indicate the type of access point that is available at that specific spot There are three basic designs that are currently used a pair of back to back semicircles which denotes an open node a closed circle which denotes a closed node a closed circle with a W inside which denotes a Glossary 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 node equipped with WEP Warchalkers also draw identifiers above the symbols to indicate the password that can be used to access the node which can easily be obtained with sniffer software As a recent development the debate over the legality of warchalking is still going on The practice stems from the U S Depression era culture of wandering hobos who would make marks outside of homes to indicate to other wanderers whether the home was
112. SSN is designed to work with existing 802 11 products and offers forward compatibility with 802 11i the new wireless security architecture being defined in the IEEE E 8 Wireless Networking Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 WPA offers the following benefits e Enhanced data privacy e Robust key management e Data origin authentication e Data integrity protection The Wi Fi Alliance is now performing interoperability certification testing on Wi Fi Protected Access products Starting August of 2003 all new Wi Fi certified products will have to support WPA NETGEAR will implement WPA on client and access point products and make this available in the second half of 2003 Existing Wi Fi certified products will have one year to add WPA support or they will lose their Wi Fi certification The 802 111 standard is currently in draft form with ratification due at the end of 2003 While the new IEEE 802 11i standard is being ratified wireless vendors have agreed on WPA as an interoperable interim standard How Does WPA Compare to WEP WEP is a data encryption method and is not intended as a user authentication mechanism WPA user authentication is implemented using 802 1x and the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP Support for 802 1x authentication is required in WPA In the 802 11 standard 802 1x authentication was optional For details on EAP
113. Scope Conventions and Formats This reference manual assumes that the reader has basic to intermediate computer and Internet skills However basic computer network Internet firewall and VPN technologies tutorial information is provided in the Appendices and on the Netgear website This guide uses the following typographical conventions Table 1 1 Typographical Conventions italics Emphasis books CDs URL names bold User input fixed Screen text file and server names extensions commands IP addresses This guide uses the following formats to highlight special messages Ce Note This format is used to highlight information of importance or special interest This manual is written for the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server according to these specifications Table 1 2 Manual Scope Product Version ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Manual Publication Date May 2005 Note Product updates are available on the NETGEAR Inc Web site at http kbserver netgear com products FWGI114P v2 asp gt About This Manual 1 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 How to Use This Manual The HTML version of this manual includes the following e Buttons gt and lt for browsing forwards or backwards through the manual one page at a tim
114. Sec is one of the most complete secure and commercially available standards based protocols developed for transporting data What is a VPN A VPN is a shared network where private data is segmented from other traffic so that only the intended recipient has access The term VPN was originally used to describe a secure connection over the Internet Today however VPN is also used to describe private networks such as Frame Relay Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM and Multiprotocol Label Switching MPLS A key aspect of data security is that the data flowing across the network is protected by encryption technologies Private networks lack data security which allows data attackers to tap directly into the network and read the data IPSec based VPNs use encryption to provide data security which increases the network s resistance to data tampering or theft IPSec based VPNs can be created over any type of IP network including the Internet Frame Relay ATM and MPLS but only the Internet is ubiquitous and inexpensive VPNs are traditionally used for e Intranets Intranets connect an organization s locations These locations range from the headquarters offices to branch offices to a remote employee s home Often this connectivity is used for e mail and for sharing applications and files While Frame Relay ATM and MPLS accomplish these tasks the shortcomings of each limits connectivity The cost of connecting home users is also
115. Server Model FWG114P v2 3 Key 1 RJ 45 plug 2 Category 5 UTP patch cable Figure B 3 Category 5 UTP Cable with Male RJ 45 Plug at Each End Note Flat silver satin telephone cable may have the same RJ 45 plug However using telephone cable results in excessive collisions causing the attached port to be partitioned or disconnected from the network Uplink Switches Crossover Cables and MDI MDIX Switching In the wiring table above the concept of transmit and receive are from the perspective of the PC which is wired as Media Dependant Interface MDI In this wiring the PC transmits on pins 1 and 2 At the hub the perspective is reversed and the hub receives on pins 1 and 2 This wiring is referred to as Media Dependant Interface Crossover MDI X When connecting a PC to a PC or a hub port to another hub port the transmit pair must be exchanged with the receive pair This exchange is done by one of two mechanisms Most hubs provide an Uplink switch which will exchange the pairs on one port allowing that port to be connected to another hub using a normal Ethernet cable The second method is to use a crossover cable which is a special cable in which the transmit and receive pairs are exchanged at one of the two cable connectors Crossover cables are often unmarked as such and must be identified by comparing the two connectors Since the cable connectors are clear plastic it is easy to place them side by side and vi
116. TGEAR Region Select Region gt Channel i0 2 457GHz Current Channel No 10 2 457GHz Mode E and b gt Wireless Access Point M Enable Wireless Access Point M Allow Broadcast of Name SSID Wireless Station Access List Setup Access List Wireless Security l WPA PSK Y Encryption TKIP gt Passphrase 8 63 characters Key Lifetime 5 minutes Apply Cancel Figure 4 9 Wireless Settings menu WPA PSK 3 Select WPA PSK on the pulldown menu The WPA PSK menu will open 4 Select the desired Encryption method For WPA PSK you can choose TKIP or AES 5 Enter the pre shared key in the Passphrase field Enter a word or group of printable characters in the Passphrase box The Passphrase must be 8 to 63 characters in length The 256 Bit key used for encryption is generated from this passphrase 6 Enter the Key Lifetime This setting determines how often the encryption key is changed Shorter periods provide greater security but adversely affect performance If desired you can change the default value 7 Click Apply to save your settings Wireless Configuration 4 19 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 How to Configure WPA2 PSK Note Not all wireless adapters support WPA2 Furthermore client software is required on the client Windows XP and Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 do include the client software that
117. These topics are presented here 6 10 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Order of Precedence for Rules As you define new rules they are added to the tables in the Rules menu For any traffic attempting to pass through the firewall the packet information is subjected to the rules in the order of the entries in the Rules Table beginning at the top and proceeding to the default rules at the bottom In some cases the order of precedence of two or more rules may be important in determining the disposition of a packet The Move button allows you to relocate a defined rule to a new position in the table Rules Menu Options Options Enable VPN Passthrough IPSec PPTP L2TP Drop fragmented IP packets Block TCP flood C Block UDP flood C Block non standard packets Use the Options checkboxes to enable the following e Enable VPN Passthrough IPSec PPTP L2TP If LAN users need to use VPN Virtual Private Networking software on their computer and connect to remote sites or servers enable this checkbox This will allow the VPN protocols IPSec PPIP L2TP to be used If this checkbox is not checked these protocols are blocked e Drop fragmented IP packets If checked all fragmented IP packets will be dropped discarded Normally this should NOT be checked e Block TCP flood If checked when a
118. True Firewall with Content Filtering cccccccecsseceeeeessneeeeeseesteeeeenees 2 3 SOGNE sariani AE AA E S 2 4 Autosensing Ethernet Connections with Auto Uplink ss ssesssssssssssssssessssssresresssns 2 4 Extensive Pitoco SUP seriinin oa tava eaten axonal 2 5 Easy Installation and Management sssismnirnsin sorte amends aes 2 6 NETGEAR Related Producis iccccceussaccearsstardcctineciactenistdidcanannmnmiaanenenen 2 6 Pacekan CONEDE sccncedcdocsinedeiscceatanreaccranerds soegdenenddagumededoeanntnydoctdeneeaciontiaddbceameniainienats 2 7 The FWGTI4P y2 Front Panel sei cnccsiniinaetvinsconmnansriioadxsnisivensniuss siakstuiusianamovsinideneuniida 2 7 The FWGTI4P v2 Roar Panel sscssiicasiecacainssscadanaus mansaiuseaddandlaimaaummieandaaonimanmmte 2 8 Chapter 3 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet What You Will Need Before You Begin scssissisissrirsaisossrisnsoniirinoisosrinnnsosninaa n 3 1 Cabling and Computer Hardware Requirements cccccceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseneeeenaeees 3 1 Computer Network Configuration Requirements sseesseessesssresrrrsssrrssrrnsrreesrens 3 1 internet Configuration ReguiremMentS scicccisicdatcecasededactaanndaiedeinescicnandsdaneentepiecetansets 3 2 Where Do Get the Internet Configuration Parameters cccsceeeeseeeesteeteeeees 3 2 Record Your Internet Connection Information ccccceeecceeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 3 3 Contents v 201 10301 02 May 2005 Connecting the F
119. User will be identified by an IP address you should configure that computer with a fixed or reserved IP address Services and Rules Regulate Inbound and Outbound Traffic The ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 firewall lets you regulate what ports are available to the various TCP IP protocols Follow these two steps to configure inbound or outbound traffic 1 Define a Service 2 Set up an Inbound or Outbound Rule that uses the Service These steps are discussed below Defining a Service Services are functions performed by server computers at the request of client computers For example Web servers serve Web pages time servers serve time and date information and game hosts serve data about other players moves When a computer on the Internet sends a request for service to a server computer the requested service is identified by a service or port number This number appears as the destination port number in the transmitted IP packets For example a packet that is sent with destination port number 80 is an HTTP Web server request Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 6 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The service numbers for many common protocols are defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF and published in RFC1700 Assigned Numbers Service numbers for other applications are typically ch
120. WG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server Verify That Basic Requirements Are Met cceecceeesteeeereeeeeeee Sane Basic Setup Troubleshooting Tipe cisscswtrccccauepesorrcpnis acca en TU FWG114P v2 Setup Wizard Auto Detection ccecceccceseeeceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee OT Wizard Detected Login Account SetUp cisscsissasccissesesessgessnsnnasgactstactaessecsiategetenaezee OU Wizard Detected Dynamic IP Account Setup cecccessseteeeeesseeteeeessttteeeeee OUTS Wizard Detected Fixed IP Account Setup aeons How to Configure the Serial Port as the Fia inion Cornea ee er O Testing Your Internet Connection 3 Manually Configuring Your Internet Connection wares How to Manually Configure the Primary Internet Connection ee 3 19 Chapter 4 Wireless Configuration Observing Performance Placement and Range Guidelines ccceceeeetere 4 Implementing Appropriate Wireless Security 0 0 cc eeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeetaeeeeeteeeeeneeees AO Understanding Wireless Sots citi cdascisactscccseseincinssatntueectunntiadsborhecacceibientuseedcebinacnecnal oe Default Factory Settings i aiaia Before You Change the SSID and WEP E IE P EENE anano How to Set Up and Test Basic Wireless Connectivity 0 cccesecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeee 48 How to Restrict Wireless Access by MAC Address cc cesceeseceteeeeeeeeeeteneeeeee 429 How to Configure WEP EE errr ee reer re ere err rere E rere r
121. When you specify your correct ESSID in your client setup you ensure that you connect to your wireless network rather than another network in range See SSID The ESSID can be called by different terms such as Network Name Preferred Network SSID or Wireless LAN Service Area Ethernet International standard networking technology for wired implementations Basic 10BaseT networks offer a bandwidth of about 10 Mbps Fast Ethernet 100 Mbps and Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbps are becoming popular Firewall A system that secures a network and prevents access by unauthorized users Firewalls can be software hardware or a combination of both Firewalls can prevent unrestricted access into a network as well as restrict data from flowing out of a network Glossary 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Gateway In the wireless world a gateway is an access point with additional software capabilities such as providing NAT and DHCP Gateways may also provide VPN support roaming firewalls various levels of security etc Hot Spot also referred to as Public Access Location A place where you can access Wi Fi service This can be for free or for a fee HotSpots can be inside a coffee shop airport lounge train station convention center hotel or any other public meeting area Corporations and campuses are also implementing HotSpots to provide wireless Internet acce
122. Wireless Firewall Print Server is stored in FLASH memory and can be upgraded as new software is released by NETGEAR Upgrade files can be downloaded from Netgear s Web site If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary file before sending it to the router The upgrade file can be sent to the router using your browser Note The Web browser used to upload new firmware into the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server must support HTTP uploads NETGEAR recommends using Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator 3 0 or above From the Main Menu of the browser interface under the Maintenance heading select the Router Upgrade heading To upload new firmware 1 Download and unzip the new software file from NETGEAR 2 Inthe Router Upgrade menu click the Browse button and browse to the location of the binary IMG upgrade file 3 Click Upload Note When uploading software to the FWG114P v2 it is important not to interrupt the Web browser by closing the window clicking a link or loading a new page If the browser is interrupted it may corrupt the software When the upload is complete your router will automatically restart The upgrade process will typically take about one minute In some cases you may need to reconfigure the router after upgrading Configuration File Management The configuration settings of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server are stored within the router i
123. Your Internet Account For broadband access to the Internet you need to contract with an Internet service provider ISP for a single user Internet access account using a cable modem or DSL modem This modem must be a separate physical box not a card and must provide an Ethernet port intended for connection to a Network Interface Card NIC in a computer Your firewall does not support a USB connected broadband modem For a single user Internet account your ISP supplies TCP IP configuration information for one computer With a typical account much of the configuration information is dynamically assigned when your PC is first booted up while connected to the ISP and you will not need to know that dynamic information In order to share the Internet connection among several computers your firewall takes the place of the single PC and you need to configure it with the TCP IP information that the single PC would normally use When the firewall s Internet port is connected to the broadband modem the firewall appears to be a single PC to the ISP The firewall then allows the computers on the local network to masquerade as the single PC to access the Internet through the broadband modem The method used by the firewall to accomplish this is called Network Address Translation NAT or IP masquerading Are Login Protocols Used Some ISPs require a special login protocol in which you must enter a login name and password in order to access the
124. a Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN to resolve the public address of one or both routers The configurations screens and settings for the FVS318 and FVM318 are the same Configuration Template The configuration in this document follows the addressing and configuration mechanics defined by the VPN Consortium Gather all the necessary information before you begin the configuration process Verify whether the firmware is up to date all of the addresses that will be necessary and all of the parameters that need to be set on both sides Check that there are no firewall restrictions Table H 1 Summary VPN Consortium Scenario Scenario 1 Type of VPN LAN to LAN or Gateway to Gateway not PC Client to Gateway Security Scheme IKE with Preshared Secret Key not Certificate based Date Tested December 2003 Model Firmware Tested NETGEAR Gateway A FVS318 firmware version A1 4 or 2 0 FVM318 firmware version 1 1 NETGEAR Gateway B FVS328 with firmware version 1 0 Release 00 IP Addressing NETGEAR Gateway A Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN NETGEAR Gateway B Static IP address NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 H 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 10 5 6 0 24 VPNC Example 172 23 9 0 24 Network Interface Addressing Gateway A Gateway B WAN IP oN la
125. a NAT Network Address Translation router while adding features for dealing with a hacker intrusion or attack and for controlling the types of traffic that can flow between the two networks Unlike simple Internet sharing NAT routers a firewall uses a process called stateful packet inspection to protect your network from attacks and intrusions NAT performs a very limited stateful inspection in that it considers whether the incoming packet is in response to an outgoing request but true Stateful Packet Inspection goes far beyond NAT To configure these features of your router click on the subheadings under the Content Filtering heading in the Main Menu of the browser interface The subheadings are described below Using the Block Sites Menu to Screen Content The FWG114P v2 allows you to restrict access based on the following categories e Use of a proxy server e Type of file Java ActiveX Cookie Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 6 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Web addresses e Web address keywords These options are discussed below The Keyword Blocking menu is shown here Block Sites Turn Proxy filtering on C Turn Java filtering on C Turn ActiveX filtering on C Turn Cookies filtering on M Turn keyword blocking on Add Keyword Block sites containing these keywords or domain names Delete Keyword Tr
126. a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC Caution 1 FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement The equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body 2 This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user authority to operate the equipment EN 55 022 Declaration of Conformance This is to certify that the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 is shielded against the generation of radio interference in accordance with the application of Council Directive 89 336 EEC Article 4a Conformity is declared by the application of EN 55 022 Class B CISPR 22 201 10301
127. across the world every machine on the Internet must have a unique address to make sure that transmitted data reaches the correct destination Blocks of addresses are assigned to organizations by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA Individual users and small organizations may obtain their addresses either from the ANA or from an Internet service provider ISP You can contact IANA at www iana org The Internet Protocol IP uses a 32 bit address structure The address is usually written in dot notation also called dotted decimal notation in which each group of eight bits is written in decimal form separated by decimal points For example the following binary address 11000011 00100010 00001100 00000111 is normally written as 195 34 12 7 The latter version is easier to remember and easier to enter into your computer In addition the 32 bits of the address are subdivided into two parts The first part of the address identifies the network and the second part identifies the host node or station on the network The dividing point may vary depending on the address range and the application There are five standard classes of IP addresses These address classes have different ways of determining the network and host sections of the address allowing for different numbers of hosts on a network Each address type begins with a unique bit pattern which is used by the TCP IP software to identify the address class After the addres
128. adapter is properly connected to a functioning power outlet e Check that you are using the 12 V DC power adapter supplied by NETGEAR for this product If the error persists you have a hardware problem and should contact technical support Troubleshooting 11 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 LEDs Never Turn Off When the router is turned on the LEDs turns on for about 10 seconds and then turns off If all the LEDs stay on there is a fault within the router If all LEDs are still on one minute after power up e Cycle the power to see if the router recovers e Clear the router s configuration to the factory defaults This will set the router s IP address to 192 168 0 1 This procedure is explained in Restoring the Default Configuration and Password on page 11 7 If the error persists you might have a hardware problem and should contact technical support LAN or Internet Port LEDs Not On If either the LAN LEDs or the Internet LED do not light when the Ethernet connection is made check the following e Make sure that the Ethernet cable connections are secure at the router and at the hub or workstation e Make sure that power is turned on to the connected hub or workstation e Be sure you are using the correct cable When connecting the router s Internet port to a broadband modem use the cable that was supplied with the broadband
129. al server for example a Web server or game server visible and available to the Internet The rule tells the router to direct inbound traffic for a particular service to one local server based on the destination port number This is also known as port forwarding 6 6 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Note Some home broadband accounts do not allow you to run any server processes a such as a Web or FTP server Your ISP may check for servers and suspend your account if it discovers active servers at your location If you are unsure refer to the Acceptable Use Policy of your ISP Follow these guidelines when setting up port forwarding inbound rules e If your external IP address is assigned dynamically by your ISP the IP address may change periodically as the DHCP lease expires Consider using the Dyamic DNS feature in the Advanced menus so that external users can always find your network e Ifthe IP address of the local server computer is assigned by DHCP it may change when the computer is rebooted To avoid this use the Reserved IP address feature in the LAN IP menu to keep the computer s IP address constant e Local computers must access the local server using the local LAN address of the computer Attempts by local computers to access the server using the external WAN IP address will fail
130. ame Mac Address Edit Delete Cancel Wireless Station Entry Device Name MAC Address Add Cancel Refresh Figure 4 4 Wireless Station Access menu 3 Click the Turn Access Control On checkbox to enable MAC filtering Wireless Configuration 4 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 4 Click Add to open the Wireless Card Access Setup menu You can select a device from the list of available wireless cards the FWG114P v2 has discovered in your area or you can manually enter the MAC address and Device Name usually the NetBIOS name 5 Click Add to add this device to your MAC access control list Note When configuring the FWG114P v2 from a wireless computer whose MAC gt address is not in the access control list if you select Turn Access Control On you will lose your wireless connection when you click Apply You must then access the wireless firewall print server from a wired computer or from a wireless computer which is on the access control list to make any further changes 6 Be sure to click Apply to save your trusted wireless PCs list settings Now only devices on this list will be allowed to wirelessly connect to the FWG114P v2 To remove a MAC address from the table click to select it then click the Delete button How to Configure WEP Note When changing the wireless settings from a
131. ample we will assume you have set the local LAN address as 10 5 6 1 for Gateway A and have set your own password VPN Settings eme m a 1 2 O 3 O 4 ol 5 Ol 6 7 O 8 Edit Delete Cancel Figure G 2 NETGEAR FVS318 VPN Settings Pre Configuration G 2 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 Click the VPN Settings link on the left side of the Settings management GUI Click the radio button of the first available VPN leg all 8 links are available in the example Click the Edit button below This will take you to the VPN Settings Main Mode Menu VPN Settings Main Mode Connection Name toFVS5 328 Local IPSec Identifier 1415 16 17 Remote IPSec Identifier 22 23 24 25 Tunnel can be accessed from a subnet of local address v Local LAN start IP Address 10 5 e o Local LAN finish IP Address I Local LAN IP Subnetmask 255 255 255 Tunnel can access a subnet of remote address Y Remote LAN start IP Address 172 23 9 Remote LAN finish IP Address Remote LAN IP Subnetmask 255 255 255 J0 Remote WAN IP or FQDN 22 23 24 25 Figure G 3 Figure 3 NETGEAR FVS318 VPN Settings part 1 Main Mode Inthe Connection Name box enter in a unique name for the VPN tunnel to be configured between the NETGEAR devices For this exam
132. andard for wireless LANs encompassing three incompatible non interoperable technologies Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum FHSS Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS and Infrared WECA s Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance now Wi Fi Alliance focus is on 802 11b an 11 Mbps high rate DSSS standard for wireless networks Infrastructure mode A client setting providing connectivity to an access point AP As compared to Ad Hoc mode whereby PCs communicate directly with each other clients set in Infrastructure Mode all pass data through a central AP The AP not only mediates wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood but also provides communication with the wired network See Ad Hoc and AP 6 Glossary 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 IP Internet Protocol address A 32 bit number that identifies each sender or receiver of information that is sent across the Internet An IP address has two parts an identifier of a particular network on the Internet and an identifier of the particular device which can be a server or a workstation within that network ISO Network Model A network model developed by the International Standards Organization ISO that consists of seven different levels or layers By standardizing these layers and the interfaces in between different portions of a given protocol can be modified or changed as technol
133. ange of one access point it moves into the range of another As a result wireless clients can freely roam from one Access Point domain to another and still maintain seamless network connection Wireless Networking Basics E 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Ad Hoc Mode Peer to Peer Workgroup In an ad hoc network computers are brought together as needed thus there is no structure or fixed points to the network each node can generally communicate with any other node There is no Access Point involved in this configuration This mode enables you to quickly set up a small wireless workgroup and allows workgroup members to exchange data or share printers as supported by Microsoft networking in the various Windows operating systems Some vendors also refer to ad hoc networking as peer to peer group networking In this configuration network packets are directly sent and received by the intended transmitting and receiving stations As long as the stations are within range of one another this is the easiest and least expensive way to set up a wireless network Network Name Extended Service Set Identification ESSID The Extended Service Set Identification ESSID is one of two types of Service Set Identification SSID In an ad hoc wireless network with no access points the Basic Service Set Identification BSSID is used In an infrastructure wireless
134. ard is provided and online help documentation is built into the browser based Web Management Interface e Smart Wizard The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server automatically senses the type of Internet connection asking you only for the information required for your type of ISP account e Diagnostic functions The firewall incorporates built in diagnostic functions such as Ping DNS lookup and remote reboot e Remote management The firewall allows you to log in to the Web Management Interface from a remote location on the Internet For security you can limit remote management access to a specified remote IP address or range of addresses and you can choose a nonstandard port number e Visual monitoring The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server s front panel LEDs provide an easy way to monitor its status and activity e Regional support including ISPs like Telstra DSL and BigPond or Deutsche Telekom e Flash memory for firmware upgrades NETGEAR Related Products The following NETGEAR products are related to the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e ProSafe Dual Band Wireless PC Card Model WAGS11 e ProSafe Dual Band Wireless PCI Adapter Model WAG311 2 6 Introduction 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e 54 Mbps Wireless PC Card Model WG511 e 54 Mbps Wireless PCI Card Model WG311 e 54 Mbps
135. ard your request to the ISP The ISP forwards your request to the company where you are employed and the request will likely be denied by the company s firewall In this case you must define a static route telling your router that 134 177 0 0 should be accessed through the ISDN router at 192 168 0 100 The static route would look like Figure 10 3 In this example e The Destination IP Address and IP Subnet Mask fields specify that this static route applies to all 134 177 x x addresses e The Gateway IP Address fields specifies that all traffic for these addresses should be forwarded to the ISDN router at 192 168 0 100 e A Metric value of 1 will work since the ISDN router is on the LAN e Private is selected only as a precautionary security measure in case RIP is activated Enabling Remote Management Access Using the Remote Management page you can allow a user or users on the Internet to configure upgrade and check the status of your FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server Note Be sure to change the router s default configuration password to a very secure J password The ideal password should contain no dictionary words from any language and should be a mixture of letters both upper and lower case numbers and symbols Your password can be up to 30 characters To configure your router for Remote Management 1 Select the Turn Remote Management On check box 2 Specify what external addresses will be allow
136. as the local identifier Enter a Remote IPSec Identifier name for the remote NETGEAR FVS328 Gateway B This name must be entered in the other endpoint as Local IPSec Identifier In this example we used 22 23 24 25 as the remote identifier Choose a subnet from local address from the Tunnel can be accessed from pull down menu Type the starting LAN IP Address of Gateway A 10 5 6 1 in our example in the Local IP Local LAN start IP Address field Type the finishing LAN IP Address of Gateway A 0 0 0 0 in our example in the Local IP Local LAN finish IP Address field Type the LAN Subnet Mask of Gateway A 255 255 255 0 in our example in the Local LAN IP Subnetmask field Choose a subnet from local address from the Tunnel can access pull down menu Type the starting LAN IP Address of Gateway B 172 23 9 1 in our example in the Local IP Remote LAN Start IP Address field NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 H 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Type the finishing LAN IP Address of Gateway B 0 0 0 0 in our example in the Local IP Remote LAN Finish IP Address field Type the LAN Subnet Mask of Gateway B 255 255 255 0 in our example in the Remote LAN IP Subnetmask field Type the WAN IP address 22 23 24 25 in our example of Gateway B in the Remote WAN IP or FQDN fi
137. at you configure all hosts on a LAN segment to use the same netmask for the following reasons e So that hosts recognize local IP broadcast packets When a device broadcasts to its segment neighbors it uses a destination address of the local network address with all ones for the host address In order for this scheme to work all devices on the segment must agree on which bits comprise the host address e So that a local router or bridge recognizes which addresses are local and which are remote Private IP Addresses If your local network is isolated from the Internet for example when using NAT you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 V2 6060 172431425596 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 NETGEAR recommends that you choose your private network number from this range The DHCP server of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server is preconfigured to automatically assign private addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines explained here For more information about address assignment refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space The Internet Engineering Task Force IETF publishes RFCs on its Web site at www ietf org Singl
138. benefit of easier administration and use This is similar to 802 1x support and requires a RADIUS server in order to implement The Wi Fi Alliance will call this WPA Enterprise One variation of WPA is called WPA Pre Shared Key or WPA PSK for short this provides an authentication alternative to an expensive RADIUS server WPA PSK is a simplified but still powerful form of WPA most suitable for home Wi Fi networking To use WPA PSK a person sets a static key or passphrase as with WEP But using TKIP WPA PSK automatically changes the keys at a preset time interval making it much more difficult for hackers to find and exploit them The Wi Fi Alliance will call this WPA Personal Wi Fi Protected Access and IEEE 802 111 Comparison Wi Fi Protected Access will be forward compatible with the IEEE 802 111 security specification currently under development by the IEEE Wi Fi Protected Access is a subset of the current 802 11i draft taking certain pieces of the 802 11i draft that are ready to bring to market today such as its implementation of 802 1x and TKIP These features can also be enabled on most existing Wi Fi CERTIFIED products as a software upgrade The main pieces of the 802 111 draft that are not included in Wi Fi Protected Access are secure IBSS secure fast handoff secure de authentication and disassociation as well as enhanced encryption protocols such as AES CCMP These features are either not yet ready for market or will require ha
139. bits e Authentication with signatures authenticated by PKIX certificates both Gateway A and Gateway B have end entity certificates that chain to a root authority called Trusted Root CA e SA lifetime of 28800 seconds eight hours with no kbytes rekeying The IKE Phase 2 parameters used in Scenario 2 are e TripleDES e SHA 1 e ESP tunnel mode e MODP group 2 1024 bits e Perfect forward secrecy for rekeying e SA lifetime of 3600 seconds one hour with no kbytes rekeying Virtual Private Networking 8 25 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Selectors for all IP protocols all ports between 10 5 6 0 24 and 172 23 9 0 24 using Pv4 subnets Scenario 2 FWG114P v2 to FWG114P v2 with Certificates The following is a typical gateway to gateway VPN that uses Public Key Infrastructure x 509 PKIX certificates for authentication The network setup is identical to the one given in scenario 1 The IKE Phase 1 and Phase 2 parameters are identical to the ones given in scenario 1 with the exception that the identification is done with signatures authenticated by PKIX certificates Note Before completing this configuration scenario make sure the correct Time Zone is set on the FWG114P v2 For instructions on this topic please see Setting the Time Zone on page 6 13 1 Obtain a root certificate a Obtain the root certificate which includes th
140. ble 2 1 LED Descriptions Label Activity Description POWER On Power is supplied to the firewall TEST On The system is initializing Off The system is ready and running PRINTER ACT On The printer is connected and powered on Blinking Data is being transmitted or received by the Printer port ALERT On Amber The printer has a problem such as out of paper out of ink or a paper jam MODEM ACT Blinking Data is being transmitted or received by the Modem port LINK On Amber The port has detected a link with an attached device INTERNET Note The operation of these LEDs depends on how the WAN port is configured 100 100 Mbps On The Internet WAN port is operating at 100 Mbps Off The Internet WAN port is operating at 10 Mbps LINK ACT On The Internet port has detected a link with an attached device Link Activity Blinking Data is being transmitted or received by the Internet port LOCAL 100 100 Mbps On The Local port is operating at 100 Mbps Off The Local port is operating at 10 Mbps LINK ACT On The Local port has detected a link with an attached device Link Activity Blinking The Local port is transmitting or receiving data WLAN On The Wireless WLAN port is operating Blinking The Wireless WLAN port is transmitting or receiving data The FWG114P v2 Rear Panel The rear panel of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server contains the port connections listed below 2 8 Introduction 201 10301 02
141. box For 64 bit WEP Enter ten hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 A F For 128 bit WEP Enter twenty six hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 A F Please refer to Overview of WEP Parameters on page E 5 for a full explanation of each of these options as defined by the IEEE 802 11b wireless communication standard 5 Click Apply to save your settings How to Configure WPA with Radius Note Not all wireless adapters support WPA Furthermore client software is required on the client Windows XP and Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 do include the client software that supports WPA Nevertheless the wireless adapter hardware and driver must also support WPA Consult the product document for your wireless adapter and WPA client software for instructions on configuring WPA settings To configure WPA with Radius follow these steps 1 Log in at the default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with the default user name of admin and default password of password or using whatever LAN address and password you have set up 4 12 Wireless Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 Click Wireless Settings in the main menu of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name SSID NETGEAR Region Select Region Channel 10 2 457GHz gt Current Channel No 10 2 457GHz Mode gandb Wireless Acce
142. btes IPSec PFS PFS Key Group Group 2 1024 Bit _ Traffic Selector Local IP Subnet address Start IP address 10 5 ijg Jo LAN IP addresses Finish IP address SubnetMask 25s 2ss 2ss o Remote IP Subnet address Start IP address 172 23 _ 9 Jo Finish IP address Subnet Mask 255 4255 1 1255 0 AH Configuration CI Enable Authentication Authentication Algorithm MD5 ESP Configuration Enable Encryption Encryption Algorithm 3DES Enable Authentication Authentication Algorithm SHA 1 Figure 8 15 Scenario 1 VPN Auto Policy b Configure the IKE Policy according to the settings in the illustration above and click Apply to save your settings For more information on IKE Policy topics please see IKE Policies Automatic Key and Authentication Management on page 8 3 Note Selecting ANY for the Traffic Selectors means all traffic goes through the IPSec tunnel and prevents access to the Internet 5 After applying these changes all traffic from the range of LAN IP addresses specified on FWG114P v2 A and FWG114P v2 B will flow over a secure VPN tunnel Virtual Private Networking 8 23 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 How to Check VPN Connections You can test connectivity and view VPN status information on the FWG114P v2 1 To test
143. cedures Alternatively you can configure your gateways using manual key exchange which involves manually configuring each paramter on both gateways IPSec Security Association IKE VPN Tunnel Negotiation Steps 1 Communication HW __ request sent to VPN Gateway VPN Gatewa VPN Gat Y e 2 IKE Phase lauthentication Baas ceili 3 IKE Phase II negotiation 3 lt 4 Secure data transfer 3 5 IPSec tunnel termination Figure F 6 IPSec SA negotiation 1 The IPSec software on Host A initiates the IPSec process in an attempt to communicate with Host B The two computers then begin the Internet Key Exchange IKE process Virtual Private Networking F 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 IKE Phase I a The two parties negotiate the encryption and authentication algorithms to use in the IKE SAs The two parties authenticate each other using a predetermined mechanism such as preshared keys or digital certificates A shared master key is generated by the Diffie Hellman Public key algorithm within the IKE framework for the two parties The master key is also used in the second phase to derive IPSec keys for the SAs 3 IKE Phase II a The two parties negotiate the encryption and authentication algorithms to use in the IPSec SAs The master key is used to derive the IPSec keys for the SAs Once the SA keys are created and
144. ch can operate at optimal performance A switch acts as a networks traffic cop rather than transmitting all the packets it receives to all ports as a hub does a switch transmits packets to only the receiving port TCP Transmission Control Protocol A protocol used along with the Internet Protocol IP to send data in the form of individual units called packets between computers over the Internet While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data TCP takes care of keeping track of the packets that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet 10 Glossary 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 For example when a web page is downloaded from a web server the TCP program layer in that server divides the file into packets numbers the packets and then forwards them individually to the IP program layer Although each packet has the same destination IP address it may get routed differently through the network At the other end TCP reassembles the individual packets and waits until they have all arrived to forward them as a single file TCP IP The underlying technology behind the Internet and communications between computers in a network The first part TCP is the transport part which matches the size of the messages on either end and guarantees that the correct message has been received The IP part is the user s computer a
145. concept of the Security Association SA An SA is a logical connection between two devices transferring data An SA provides data protection for unidirectional traffic by using the defined IPSec protocols An IPSec tunnel typically consists of two unidirectional SAs which together provide a protected full duplex data channel The SAs allow an enterprise to control exactly what resources may communicate securely according to security policy To do this an enterprise can set up multiple SAs to enable multiple secure VPNs as well as define SAs within the VPN to support different departments and business partners F 4 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Mode SAs operate using modes A mode is the method in which the IPSec protocol is applied to the packet IPSec can be used in tunnel mode or transport mode Typically the tunnel mode is used for gateway to gateway IPSec tunnel protection while transport mode is used for host to host IPSec tunnel protection A gateway is a device that monitors and manages incoming and outgoing network traffic and routes the traffic accordingly A host is a device that sends and receives network traffic e Transport Mode The transport mode IPSec implementation encapsulates only the packet s payload The IP header is not changed After the packet is processed with IPSec the new IP packet contains the
146. connectivity between the Gateway A FWG114P v2 LAN and the Gateway B LAN follow these steps a d Using our example from a PC attached to the FWG114P v2 on LAN A on a Windows PC click the Start button on the taskbar and then click Run Enter ping t 172 23 9 1 and then click OK This will cause a continuous ping to be sent to the LAN interface of Gateway B After between several seconds and two minutes the ping response should change from timed out to reply At this point the connection is established 2 To test connectivity between the FWG114P v2 Gateway A and Gateway B WAN ports follow these steps a d Using our example log in to the FWG114P v2 on LAN A go to the main menu Maintenance section and click the Diagnostics link To test connectivity to the WAN port of Gateway B enter 22 23 24 25 and then click Ping This will cause a ping to be sent to the WAN interface of Gateway B After between several seconds and two minutes the ping response should change from timed out to reply You may have to run this test several times before you get the reply message back from the target FWG114P v2 At this point the connection is established Note If you want to ping the FWG114P v2 as a test of network connectivity be sure the FWG114P v2 is configured to respond to a ping on the Internet WAN port by checking the checkbox seen in Rules menu on page 6 5 However to preserve a high
147. cs link of the FWG114P v2 main menu Monitoring the PC VPN Connection Information on the progress and status of the VPN client connection can be viewed by opening the Netgear ProSafe VPN Client Connection Monitor or Log Viewer To launch these functions click on the Windows Start button then select Programs then Netgear ProSafe VPN Client then either the Connection Monitor or Log Viewer The Log Viewer screen for a successful connection is similar to the one shown below IN Log Viewer NETGEAR ProSafe VPN Client Clear Freeze Save Log Print i 11 22 09 31 53 401 22 09 31 53 441 My Connections FVL328 Initiating IKE Phase 1 IP ADDR 66 120 188 153 22 09 31 53 891 My Connections FVL328 SENDING gt gt gt gt ISAKMP OAK AG SA KE NON ID VID 5x 31 54 883 My Connections FVL328 RECEIVED lt lt lt ISAKMP OAK AG SA KE NON ID HASH 31 55 093 My Connections FVL328 SENDING gt gt gt gt ISAKMP OAK AG HASH NOTIFY STATUS_INITIAL_CONTACT 31 55 093 My Connections FYL328 Established IKE SA 22 09 31 55 093 MY COOKIE 3216 b1 c8 d4 b1 Sd cf 11 22 09 31 55 093 HIS COOKIE 45 41 53 30 7f d7 fb 24 11 22 09 31 55 253 My Connections FVL328 Initiating IKE Phase 2 with Client IDs message id 2043512C 22 09 31 55 253 Initiator IP ADDR 192 168 0 3 prot 0 port 0 31 55 253 Responder IP SUBNET MASK 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 prot 0 port 0 31 55 253 My Connections F L328 SENDING gt gt gt gt ISA
148. ct Microsoft d Select TCP IP and then click OK Preparing Your Network C 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 If you need Client for Microsoft Networks a Click the Add button b Select Client and then click Add c Select Microsoft d Select Client for Microsoft Networks and then click OK 3 Restart your PC for the changes to take effect Enabling DHCP to Automatically Configure TCP IP Settings After the TCP IP protocol components are installed each PC must be assigned specific information about itself and resources that are available on its network The simplest way to configure this information is to allow the PC to obtain the information from the internal DHCP server of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server To use DHCP with the recommended default addresses follow these steps 1 Connect all computers to the firewall then restart the firewall and allow it to boot 2 On each attached PC open the Network control panel refer to the previous section and select the Configuration tab 3 From the components list select TCP IP gt your Ethernet adapter and click Properties 4 Inthe IP Address tab select Obtain an IP address automatically 5 Select the Gateway tab 6 If any gateways are shown remove them 7 Click OK 8 Restart the PC Repeat steps 2 through 8 for each PC on your network Selecting Wind
149. ct Printer LPR and click OK A new window called Untitled 1 will open 4 Ifthe PostScript Printer Description does not match your printer click Change and select your actual printer If your printer model does not appear click the Generic button 5 Click OK to return to the Untitled 1 window Print Server 7 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 6 Inthe LPR Printer Selection box click Change 7 Inthe Printer Address field type the name or IP address of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server The IP address will usually be 192 168 0 1 You can leave the Queue Name blank Click Verify to make sure your computer can see the printer You should see the IP address displayed above the button If no IP Address appears check that you have correctly typed the queue name or IP Address Click OK to return to the Untitled 1 window 8 At the bottom of the Untitled 1 dialog box click Create When prompted rename the printer with a descriptive name and click Save A printer icon should now appear on your desktop 9 Quit the Desktop Printer Utility Windows Printer Port Management e Print jobs can be managed from Windows Open the Printers folder Start gt Settings gt Printers and double click any printer to see the current print jobs e To delete a port created by this setup program use the Windows Delete Port facility a
150. cters For 3DES the key should be 24 characters Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Encryption Algorithm Key Out field Key Out Enter the key in the fields provided For DES the key should be 8 characters For 3DES the key should be 24 characters Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Encryption Algorithm Key In field Enable Authentication Use this checkbox to enable or disable ESP authentication for this VPN policy Authentication If you enable authentication then use this menu to select the algorithm Algorithm e MD5 is the default e SHA1 is more secure Key In Enter the key For MD5 the key should be 16 characters e For SHA 1 the key should be 20 characters Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Authentication Algorithm Key Out field Key Out Enter the key in the fields provided For MD5 the key should be 16 characters For SHA 1 the key should be 20 characters Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Authentication Algorithm Key In field NETBIOS Enable Check this if you wish NETBIOS traffic to be forwarded over the VPN tunnel The NETBIOS protocol is used by Microsoft Networking for such features as Network Neighborhood Virtual Private Networking 8 13 201 10301 02 May
151. cting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 c Securely insert the Ethernet cable from your broadband modem into the Internet port B on the FWG114P v2 Internet Port Broadband modem Figure 3 2 Connect the broadband modem to the router d Securely insert one end of the Ethernet cable that came with your wireless firewall print server into a Local port on the router such as Local port 4 C and the other end into the Ethernet port of your computer D ae F f ONONE T 7 AA Ww X F ZO a and modem gt Local Port 4 Figure 3 3 Connect the computers on your network to the router Note The FWG114P v2 incorporates Auto Uplink technology which eliminates the need to worry about crossover cables by automatically adjusting to the cable type Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 RESTART YOUR NETWORK IN THE CORRECT SEQUENCE Warning Failure to restart your network in the correct sequence could prevent you from connecting to the Internet a b c First turn on the broadband modem and wait 2 minutes Now turn on your wireless firewall print server Last turn on your computer Note If software usually logs you in to
152. cy Configuration for Auto Key Negotiation 0 0 0 ccs sees teeeee ss OO VPN Policy Configuration for Manual Key Eea dum spin ade PAAT Using Digital Certificates for IKE Auto Policy Authentication sesser 8 14 Certificate Revocation List CRL T E RE EA Walk Through of Configuration Sgu on the FWG114P v v2 How to Use the VPN Wizard to Configure a VPN Tunnel ee ere errr VPNC Scenario 1 Gateway to Gateway with Presha saan EEE o Scenario 1 FWG114P v2 to FWG114P v2 with Preshared Secrets 8 How to Check VPN Connections P AAEE EE E E E VPNC Scenario 2 Gateway to Gateway with h Certificates piiat Scenario 2 FWG114P v2 to FWG114P v2 with Ceniikaik E A E T Netgear VPN Client to FWGTIAP Y2 ss cisscocdcccccissctecesainedcactiuntieredanorivcerconieicinudeletans Pe Configuration Profile PTR PEE A E N IA AAEN E ME ET E oe Step By Step Saknar of f FWG 14P v2 gt Ga way P ere rer E T E E Step By Step Configuration of the Netgear VPN Client 8 38 Testing the VPN Connection er ree ee reer rere Tren Teme rrr a E From the Client PC to the FWGI14P v v2 E EEE E A E oer PENAS ihe PC VPN anti ON err 8 46 Viewing the FWG114P v2 VPN Status and pe IMPORTATION aricii AT Chapter 9 Maintenance Viewing Wireless Firewall Print Server Status Information s sssssssssssssesnsernseeneeeneeeeeee 9 1 Viewing a List of Attached Devices o ossicsniiis gaiiiean ai aia OE Upgrading the Router Soft
153. cy to Service BGP is Added Fri 2003 12 05 21 50 14 Administrator Action Inbound Policy to Service BGP is Modified Fri 2003 12 05 21 50 57 Administrator Action Outbound Policy to Service BGP is Modified Fri 2003 12 05 21 51 14 Administrator Action Inbound Policy to Service BGP is Deleted Fri 2003 12 05 21 52 12 Administrator Action Inbound Policy to Service BGP is Moved to Index 0 Fri 2003 12 05 21 54 41 Administrator Action Outbound Policy to Service FTP is Moved to Index 1 Fri 2003 12 05 22 01 47 Administrator Action Inbound Policy to Service BGP is changed to Disable Fri 2003 12 05 22 02 14 Administrator Action Inbound Policy to Service BGP is changed to Enable Fri 2003 12 05 22 02 35 Administrator Action Outbound Policy to Service NFS is changed to Disable Fri 2003 12 05 22 02 52 Administrator Action Outbound Policy to Service NFS is changed to Enable Notes DIRECTION Inbound or Outbound SERVICE Supported service nam Firewall Log Formats D 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 D 8 Firewall Log Formats 201 10301 02 May 2005 Appendix E Wireless Networking Basics This chapter provides an overview of Wireless networking Wireless Networking Overview The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server conforms to the Institute of Electrical an
154. d Electronics Engineers IEEE 802 11b and 802 11g standards for wireless LANs WLANs On an 802 11b or g wireless link data is encoded using direct sequence spread spectrum DSSS technology and is transmitted in the unlicensed radio spectrum at 2 5GHz The maximum data rate for the 802 11b wireless link is 11 Mbps but it will automatically back down from 11 Mbps to 5 5 2 and 1 Mbps when the radio signal is weak or when interference is detected The 802 11g auto rate sensing rates are 1 2 5 5 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps The 802 11 standard is also called Wireless Ethernet or Wi Fi by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance WECA see hitp www wi fi net an industry standard group promoting interoperability among 802 11 devices The 802 11 standard offers two methods for configuring a wireless network ad hoc and infrastructure Infrastructure Mode With a wireless Access Point you can operate the wireless LAN in the infrastructure mode This mode provides wireless connectivity to multiple wireless network devices within a fixed range or area of coverage interacting with wireless nodes via an antenna In the infrastructure mode the wireless access point converts airwave data into wired Ethernet data acting as a bridge between the wired LAN and wireless clients Connecting multiple Access Points via a wired Ethernet backbone can further extend the wireless network coverage As a mobile computing device moves out of the r
155. d any incompatibilities before you begin so that you minimize any potential complications which may arise from normal firewall or WAN processes If you are not a full time system administrator it is a good idea to familiarize yourself with the mechanics of a VPN The brief description in this appendix will help Other good sources include e The NETGEAR VPN Tutorial hitp www netgear com planetvpn pvpn_2 html e The VPN Consortium http www vpnc org e The VPN bibliography in Additional Reading on page F 11 F 6 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPN Process Overview Even though IPSec is standards based each vendor has its own set of terms and procedures for implementing the standard Because of these differences it may be a good idea to review some of the terms and the generic processes for connecting two gateways before diving into the specifics Network Interfaces and Addresses The VPN gateway is aptly named because it functions as a gatekeeper for each of the computers connected on the Local Area Network behind it In most cases each Gateway will have a public facing address WAN side and a private facing address LAN side These addresses are referred to as the network interface in documentation regarding the construction of VPN communication Please note that the addresses used in
156. d in e For each powered on computer connected to the wireless firewall print server with a securely plugged in Ethernet cable the corresponding wireless firewall print server Local port status light will be lit The label on the bottom of the wireless firewall print server identifies the number of each Local port e The Internet port status light on the wireless firewall print server will be lit if the Ethernet cable from the wireless firewall print server to the modem is plugged in securely and the modem and wireless firewall print server are turned on Make sure the network settings of the computer are correct LAN connected computers must be configured to obtain an IP address automatically via DHCP unless you have turned NAT off and are managing the IP addresses directly For instructions on these configuration settings please see the Reference Manual on the Resource CD for the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P SW 10023 03 FWG114P v2 Setup Wizard Auto Detection There are two ways you can configure your firewall to connect to the Internet e Let the FWG114P v2 auto detect the type of Internet connection you have and configure it e Manually choose which type of Internet connection you have and configure it These options are described below Unless your ISP uses DHCP you will need the parameters from your ISP you entered in Record Your Internet Connection Information on page 3 The Setup Wizard
157. d that many gateways are also firewalls VPN tunnels cannot function properly if firewall settings disallow all incoming traffic Please refer to the firewall instructions for both gateways to understand how to open specific protocols ports and addresses that you intend to allow Setting Up a VPN Tunnel Between Gateways An SA frequently called a tunnel is the set of information that allows two entities networks PCs routers firewalls gateways to trust each other and communicate securely as they pass information over the Internet F 8 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 A B FVL VPN Firewall FVL VPN Firewall 4 f a p INTERNET Cable DSL Cable DSL modem modem Figure F 5 VPN Tunnel SA The SA contains all the information necessary for gateway A to negotiate a secure and encrypted communication stream with gateway B This communication is often referred to as a tunnel The gateways contain this information so that it does not have to be loaded onto every computer connected to the gateways Each gateway must negotiate its Security Association with another gateway using the parameters and processes established by IPSec As illustrated below the most common method of accomplishing this process is via the Internet Key Exchange IKE protocol which automates some of the negotiation pro
158. d to the remote VPN endpoint In our example we use VPNclient as the Policy Name From the IKE policy drop down box select VPNclient which is the IKE Policy that was set up in the earlier step 8 36 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 From the Remote VPN Endpoint Address Type drop down box select IP Address Type 0 0 0 0 as the Address Data of the client because we are assuming the remote PC will have a dynamically assigned IP address This will also be entered in the VPN Client Internal Network IP Address field as seen in My Identity on page 8 40 Type 86400 in the SA Life Time Seconds field Type 0 in the SA Life Time Kbytes field Check the IPSec PFS check box to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy This will also be entered in the VPN Client Security Policy Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy check box as seen in Security Policy on page 8 41 From the PFS Key Group drop down box select Group 2 1024 Bit This will also be entered in the VPN Client Security Policy PFS Key Group drop down selection box as seen in Security Policy on page 8 41 From the Traffic Selector Local IP drop down box select Subnet addresses This will also be entered in the VPN Client Connection Remote Party Identity and Addressing ID Type field as seen in Security Policy Editor New Connection on
159. ddress on a network Every computer in a TCP IP network has its own IP address that is either dynamically assigned at startup or permanently assigned All TCP IP messages contain the address of the destination network as well as the address of the destination station This enables TCP IP messages to be transmitted to multiple networks subnets within an organization or worldwide TKIP A security feature that is a WEP enhancement Temporal Key Integrity Protocol and Message Integrity Check MIC is a modification of WEP to defend against known attacks WEP four patches for key mixing message integrity rekeying initialization vector protection USB Universal Serial Bus A high speed bidirectional serial connection between a PC and a peripheral that transmits data at the rate of 12 megabits per second The new USB 2 0 specification provides a data rate of up to 480 Mbps compared to standard USB at only 12 Mbps 1394 FireWire and iLink all provide a bandwidth of up to 400 Mbps VoIP Voice over IP Voice transmission using Internet Protocol to create digital packets distributed over the Internet VoIP can be less expensive than voice transmission using standard analog packets over POTS Plain Old Telephone Service VPN Virtual Private Network A type of technology designed to increase the security of information transferred over the Internet VPN can work with either wired or wireless networks as well as with dial up connections over POT
160. degree of security you should turn off this feature when you are finished with testing 3 To view the FWG114P v2 event log and status of Security Associations follow these steps a b Go to the FWG114P v2 main menu VPN section and click the VPN Status link The log screen will display a history of the VPN connections and the IPSec SA and IKE SA tables will report the status and data transmission statistics of the VPN tunnels for each policy 8 24 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPNC Scenario 2 Gateway to Gateway with Certificates The following is a typical gateway to gateway VPN that uses PKIX certificates for authentication 10 5 6 0 24 172 23 9 0 24 J Gateway A Gateway B 10 5 6 1 14 15 16 17 22 23 24 25 172 23 9 1 Figure 8 16 VPN Consortium Scenario 2 Gateway A connects the internal LAN 10 5 6 0 24 to the Internet Gateway A s LAN interface has the address 10 5 6 1 and its WAN Internet interface has the address 14 15 16 17 Gateway B connects the internal LAN 172 23 9 0 24 to the Internet Gateway B s WAN Internet interface has the address 22 23 24 25 Gateway B s LAN interface address 172 23 9 1 can be used for testing IPsec but is not needed for configuring Gateway A The IKE Phase 1 parameters used in Scenario 2 are e Main mode e TripleDES e SHA 1 e MODP group 2 1024
161. dent peer to peer connectivity in a wireless LAN An alternative set up is one where PCs communicate with each other through an AP See access point and Infrastructure mode Bandwidth The amount of transmission capacity that is available on a network at any point in time Available bandwidth depends on several variables such as the rate of data transmission speed between networked devices network overhead number of users and the type of device used to connect PCs to a network It is similar to a pipeline in that capacity is determined by size the wider the pipe the more water can flow through it the more bandwidth a network provides the more data can flow through it Standard 802 11b provides a bandwidth of 11 Mbps 802 11a and 802 11g provide a bandwidth of 54 Mbps Bits per second bps A measure of data transmission speed over communication lines based on the number of bits that can be sent or received per second Bits per second bps is often confused with bytes per second Bps While bits is a measure of transmission speed bytes is a measure of storage capability 8 bits make a byte so if a wireless network is operating at a bandwidth of 11 megabits per second 11 Mbps or 11 Mbits sec it is sending data at 1 375 megabytes per second 1 375 Mbps Bluetooth Wireless Technology A technology specification for linking portable computers personal digital assistants PDAs and mobile phones for short range transmission of voice and
162. detection The FWG114P v2 allows Internet access for up to 253 users It provides multiple Web content filtering options plus browsing activity reporting and instant alerts via e mail Parents or network administrators can establish restricted access policies based on time of day Web site addresses and address keywords and share high speed cable DSL Internet access for up to 253 personal computers With minimum setup you can install and use the router within minutes The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server provides the following features e 802 11g and 802 11b standards based wireless networking e Easy Web based setup for installation and management e Supports two VPN tunnels Content Filtering and Site Blocking Security e Wireless Multimedia WMM support e Built in 4 port 10 100 Mbps Switch and USB 2 0 Printer Port e Ethernet and Serial ports for connection to a WAN device such as a broadband modem e Extensive Protocol Support e Login capability e Front panel LEDs for easy monitoring of status and activity Introduction 2 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Flash memory for firmware upgrade e NAT off classical routing Full Routing on Both the Broadband and Serial Ports You can install configure and operate the FWG114P v2 to take full advantage of a variety of routing options on both the serial and broadband WAN ports
163. device From the Windows run menu type PING n 10 lt IP address gt where lt IP address gt is the IP address of a remote device such as your ISP s DNS server If the path is functioning correctly replies as in the previous section are displayed If you do not receive replies Check that your computer has the IP address of your router listed as the default gateway If the IP configuration of your computer is assigned by DHCP this information will not be visible in your computer s Network Control Panel Verify that the IP address of the router is listed as the default gateway Check to see that the network address of your computer the portion of the IP address specified by the netmask is different from the network address of the remote device Check that your broadband modem is connected and functioning If your ISP assigned a host name to your computer enter that host name as the Account Name in the Basic Settings menu Troubleshooting 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Your ISP could be rejecting the Ethernet MAC addresses of all but one of your PCs Many broadband ISPs restrict access by only allowing traffic from the MAC address of your broadband modem but some ISPs additionally restrict access to the MAC address of a single computer connected to that modem If this is the case you must configure your router to clone or
164. ds operating in different radio frequencies 802 11b is a standard for wireless LANs operating in the 2 4 GHz spectrum with a bandwidth of 11 Mbps 802 11a is a different standard for wireless LANs and pertains to systems operating in the 5 GHz frequency range with a bandwidth of 54 Mbps Another standard 802 11g is for WLANS operating in the 2 4 GHz frequency but with a bandwidth of 54 Mbps 802 11a Standard An IEEE specification for wireless networking that operates in the 5 GHz frequency range 5 15 GHz to 5 85 GHz with a maximum 54 Mbps data transfer rate The 5 GHz frequency band is not as crowded as the 2 4 GHz frequency because the 802 11a specification offers more radio channels than the 802 11b These additional channels can help avoid radio and microwave interference 802 11b Standard International standard for wireless networking that operates in the 2 4 GHz frequency range 2 4 GHz to 2 4835 GHz and provides a throughput of up to 11 Mbps This is a very commonly used frequency Microwave ovens cordless phones medical and scientific equipment as well as Bluetooth devices all work within the 2 4 GHz frequency band 802 11d Standard 802 11d is an IEEE standard supplementary to the Media Access Control MAC layer in 802 11 to promote worldwide use of 802 11 WLANs It will allow access points to communicate information on the permissible radio channels with acceptable power levels for client devices The devices will automatically
165. dures of your CA From the main menu VPN section click on the CRL link Click Add to add a CRL Click Browse to locate the CRL file Click Upload Now expired or revoked certificates will not be allowed to use the VPN tunnels managed by IKE policies which use this CA Note You must update the CRLs regularly in order to maintain the validity of the certificate based VPN policies Virtual Private Networking 8 31 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Netgear VPN Client to FWG114P v2 Follow these procedures to configure a VPN tunnel from a NETGEAR ProSafe VPN Client to an FWG114P v2 This case study follows the Virtual Private Network Consortium VPNC interoperability profile guidelines The menu options for the FVS328 FVL328 FWAG114 and FWG114P v2 are the same Configuration Profile The configuration in this document follows the addressing and configuration mechanics defined by the VPN Consortium Gather all the necessary information before you begin the configuration process Verify whether the firmware is up to date all of the addresses that will be necessary and all of the parameters that need to be set on both sides Check that there are no firewall restrictions Table 8 1 Summary VPN Consortium Scenario Scenario 1 Type of VPN PC Client to Gateway Security Scheme IKE with Preshared Secre
166. e e A button that displays the table of contents and an button Double click on a link in the table of contents or index to navigate directly to where the topic is described in the manual e A Knowledge Base button to access the full NETGEAR Inc online knowledge base for the product model e Links to PDF versions of the full manual and individual chapters 1 2 About This Manual 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 How to Print this Manual To print this manual you can choose one of the following several options according to your needs e Printing a Page in the HTML View Each page in the HTML version of the manual is dedicated to a major topic Use the Print button on the browser toolbar to print the page contents e Printing a Chapter Use the PDF of This Chapter link at the top left of any page Click the PDF of This Chapter link at the top right of any page in the chapter you want to print The PDF version of the chapter you were viewing opens in a browser window Note Your computer must have the free Adobe Acrobat reader installed in order to view and print PDF files The Acrobat reader is available on the Adobe Web site at http www adobe com Click the print icon in the upper left of the window Tip If your printer supports printing two pages on a single sheet of paper you can save paper and printer ink by selecting this featu
167. e netgear dydns org example yourname dyndns org User Name netgear Password seecesese Use wildcards Figure H 2 Dynamic DNS Setup menu NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 H 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 4 Select the Use a dynamic DNS service radio button for the service you are using In this example we are using www DynDNS org as the service provider Type the Host Name that your dynamic DNS service provider gave you The dynamic DNS service provider may call this the domain name In this example we are using dyndns org as the domain suffix Type the User Name for your dynamic DNS account In this example we used netgear as the Host Name This means that the complete FQDN we are using is netgear dyndns org and the Host Name is netgear Type the Password or key for your dynamic DNS account 5 Click Apply to save your configuration gt Note The router supports only basic DDNS and the login and password may not be secure If your ISP assigns a private WAN IP address such as 192 168 x x or 10 x x x the dynamic DNS service will not work because private addresses will not be routed on the Internet 6 Click VPN Settings on the left side of the Settings management GUI VPN Settings coe ee ee ee 1 j 2 Oj 3 O 4 5 O 6
168. e 8 to 63 characters in length The 256 Bit key used for encryption is generated from this passphrase 6 Enter the Key Lifetime This setting determines how often the encryption key is changed Shorter periods provide greater security but adversely affect performance If desired you can change the default value 7 Click Apply to save your settings How to Configure WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Note Not all wireless adapters support WPA and WPA2 Furthermore client software is required on the client Windows XP and Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 do include the client software that supports WPA and WPA2 Nevertheless the wireless adapter hardware and driver must also support WPA and WPA2 Consult the product document for your wireless adapter and WPA and WPA2 client software for instructions on configuring WPA and WPA2 settings To configure WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK follow these steps 1 Log in at the default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with the default user name of admin and default password of password or using whatever LAN address and password you have set up Wireless Configuration 4 21 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 Click Wireless Settings in the main menu of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name SSID NETGEAR Region Select Region Channel 10 2 457GHz 7 Current Channel No 10 2 457GHz Mode gand b x
169. e G 9 NETGEAR FWG114P v2 VPN Auto Policy part 2 From the Traffic Selector Remote IP drop down box select Subnet address Type the starting LAN IP Address of Gateway A 10 5 6 1 in our example in the Remote IP Start IP Address field Type the finishing LAN IP Address of Gateway A 0 0 0 0 in our example in the Remote IP Finish IP Address field Type the LAN Subnet Mask of Gateway A 255 255 255 0 in our example in the Remote IP Subnet Mask field From the AH Configuration Authentication Algorithm drop down box select MDS Select Enable Encryption in the ESP Configuration Enable Encryption check box From the ESP Configuration Encryption Algorithm drop down box select 3DES Select Enable Authentication in the ESP Configuration Enable Authentication check box From the ESP Configuration Authentication Algorithm drop down box select MDS Select NETBIOS Enable in the NETBIOS Enable check box 5 Click the Apply Button You will be taken back to the VPN Policies Menu page G 8 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPN Policies Policy Table Enable Name Type Local Remote AH lESP 1 W 318 Auto 172 23 9 11255 255 255 0 10 5 6 1 255 255 255 0 Disabled ESP Move Delete Apply Cancel Add Auto Policy Add Manual Policy Figure G
170. e IP Address Operation Using NAT In the past if multiple computers on a LAN needed to access the Internet simultaneously you had to obtain a range of IP addresses from the ISP This type of Internet account is more costly than a single address account typically used by a single user with a modem rather than a router The FWGI114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server employs an address sharing method called Network Address Translation NAT This method allows several networked computers to share an Internet account using only a single IP address which may be statically or dynamically assigned by your ISP Networks Routing and Firewall Basics B 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The router accomplishes this address sharing by translating the internal LAN IP addresses to a single address that is globally unique on the Internet The internal LAN IP addresses can be either private addresses or registered addresses For more information about IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT The following figure illustrates a single IP address operation Private IP addresses assigned by user IP addresses assigned by ISP 192 168 0 2 T a Figure 11 3 Single IP Address Operation Using NAT This scheme offers the additional benefit of firewall like protection because the internal LAN address
171. e LAN to LAN settings Note The LAN subnet address of each FWG114P v2 must be different 4 Click Apply for the changes to take effect Serial Port Configuration 5 7 201 10301 02 May 2005M 10207 01 Reference Manual v2 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 5 8 Serial Port Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005M 10207 01 Reference Manual v2 Chapter 6 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering This chapter describes how to use the content filtering features of the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 to protect your network These features can be found by clicking on the Content Filtering heading in the Main Menu of the browser interface Firewall Protection and Content Filtering Overview The ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 provides you with Web content filtering options plus browsing activity reporting and instant alerts via e mail Parents and network administrators can establish restricted access policies based on time of day Web addresses and Web address keywords You can also block Internet access by applications and services such as chat or games A firewall is a special category of router that protects one network the trusted network such as your LAN from another the untrusted network such as the Internet while allowing communication between the two A firewall incorporates the functions of
172. e Networking 8 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The IKE Policy Configuration fields are defined in the following table Table 8 1 IKE Policy Configuration Fields Field Description General These settings identify this policy and determine its major characteristics Policy Name The descriptive name of the IKE policy Each policy should have a unique policy name This name is not supplied to the remote VPN endpoint It is only used to help you identify IKE policies Direction Type Exchange Mode This setting is used when determining if the IKE policy matches the current traffic The drop down menu includes the following e Initiator Outgoing connections are allowed but incoming are blocked Responder Incoming connections are allowed but outgoing are blocked Both Directions Both outgoing and incoming connections are allowed Remote Access This is to allow only incoming client connections where the IP address of the remote client is unknown If Remote Access is selected the Exchange Mode MUST be Aggressive and the Identities below both Local and Remote MUST be Name On the matching VPN Policy the IP address of the remote VPN endpoint should be set to 0 0 0 0 Main Mode or Aggressive Mode This setting must match the setting used on the remote VPN endpoint e Main Mode is slower but more secu
173. e SA Life Time field type 86400 Click Apply This will bring you back to the IKE Policies Menu The FWG114P v2 IKE Policy is now displayed in the IKE Policies page Virtual Private Networking 8 35 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 3 Click the VPN Policies link under the VPN category on the left side of the main menu This will take you to the VPN Policies Menu page Click Add Auto Policy This will open a new screen titled VPN Auto Policy VPN Auto Policy General Policy Name VPNclient IKE policy VPNclient Remote VPN Endpoint address Type IP Address x Address Data 0 0 0 0 O 8A Life Time 85400 Seconds lo a Kybtes IPSec PFS PFS Key Group Group 2 1024 Bit y Traffic Selector Local IP Subnet address StartIP address 192 168 o o Finish IP address f Subnet Mask 255 255 255 o Remote IP Single address Sabeis E ie Tie I Finish IP address Al Subnet Mask joi AH Configuration C Enable Authentication authentication Algorithm MD5 ESP Configuration E Enable Encryption Encryption Algorithm 3DES E Enable Authentication Authentication Algorithm SHA 1 w NETBIOS Enable Back Apply Cancel Figure 8 24 VPN Auto Policy settings Enter a unique name to identify this policy This name is not supplie
174. e broadcast address gt of the first subnet The number 192 68 135 128 is not assigned because it is the network address of the second subnet Networks Routing and Firewall Basics B 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The following table lists the additional subnet mask bits in dotted decimal notation To use the table write down the original class netmask and replace the 0 value octets with the dotted decimal value of the additional subnet bits For example to partition your Class C network with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 into 16 subnets 4 bits the new subnet mask becomes 255 255 255 240 Table 11 1 Netmask Notation Translation Table for One Octet Number of Bits ON O oa A WwW N Dotted Decimal Value 128 192 224 240 248 252 254 255 The following table displays several common netmask values in both the dotted decimal and the masklength formats Table 11 2 Netmask Formats Dotted Decimal Masklength 255 0 0 0 8 255 255 0 0 16 255 255 255 0 24 255 255 255 128 25 255 255 255 192 26 255 255 255 224 27 255 255 255 240 28 255 255 255 248 29 255 255 255 252 30 255 255 255 254 31 255 255 255 255 32 B 6 Networks Routing and Firewall Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 NETGEAR strongly recommends th
175. e installed LPR printing can be set up on any Macintosh that has Desktop Printing installed or available Desktop Printing is supported on MacOS versions beginning from 8 1 LaserWriter8 version 8 5 1 or higher is also required For Windows NT 4 0 Server or 2000 Server LPD LPR Printing No software needs to be installed Ifusing Windows NT 4 0 Server or Windows 2000 Server LPD LPR printing can be used No software needs to be installed on either the Windows Server or each client computer Print jobs will be spooled queued on the Windows Server and can be managed using the standard Windows Server tools Print Server 7 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 For Windows XP and 2000 Use TCP IP LPR Printing Follow these instructions to set up TCP IP printing on your Windows XP and 2000 PCs Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections Install the FWG114P v2 connect your printer to the USB port on the FWG114P v2 A trig UEB pot or any dher hot see and run the Windows Add Printer Wizard Borat need to usa the wend C Canelo close the wizard and then plug the printer s cable into your coroar or pont ine printet sete yaur a Follow the instructions in the printed Windows wil automaticaly install the pinter for you Installation Guide or this manual to To continue clic
176. e left side of the Settings management GUI This will take you to the VPN Policies Menu page Click Add Auto Policy This will open a new screen titled VPN Auto Policy H 8 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPN Auto Policy General Policy Name t0318 IKE policy FYVS318 z Remote VPN Endpoint Address Type Fully Qualified Domain Name 7 Address Data netgear dyndns org SA Life Time 300 Seconds 0 Kybtes IPSec PFS PFS Key Group Group 2 1024 Bit Traffic Selector Local IP Subnet address gt StartiP address fizz 23 fe il Finish IP address o Lp Lo jo Subnet Mask fess ss 25s fo Figure H 9 NETGEAR FVS328 VPN Auto Policy part 1 Enter a unique name to identify this policy This name is not supplied to the remote VPN endpoint In our example we have used to318 as the Policy Name In the Policy Name field type to318 From the IKE policy drop down box select the IKE Policy that was set up in the earlier step the FVS318 IKE Policy From the Remote VPN Endpoint Address Type drop down box select IP Address Type the WAN IP Address of Gateway A 14 15 16 17 in our example in the Remote VPN Endpoint Address Data field Type 300 in the SA Life Time Seconds field Type 0 in the SA Life Time Kbytes field Check
177. e one computer that is allowed by the ISP Or select Use This MAC Address and enter it 8 Click Apply to save your settings 9 Click Test to test your Internet connection If the NETGEAR Web site does not appear within one minute refer to Chapter 11 Troubleshooting The remaining chapters in this manual describe how to configure the Advanced features of your firewall and how to troubleshoot problems that may occur 3 20 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Chapter 4 Wireless Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the wireless features of your FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server Observing Performance Placement and Range Guidelines In planning your wireless network you should consider the level of security required You should also select the physical placement of your FWG114P v2 in order to maximize the network speed For further information on wireless networking refer to in Appendix E Wireless Networking Basics Note Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to wirelessly connect to the wireless firewall print server For complete range and performance specifications please see Appendix A Technical Specifications gt The operating distance or range of your wireless connection can vary significantly based on the physical placement of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Pr
178. e public key from a Certificate Authority CA Note The procedure for obtaining certificates differs from a CA like Verisign and a CA such as a Windows 2000 certificate server which an organization operates for providing certificates for its members For example an administrator of a Windows 2000 certificate server might provide it to you via e mail b Save the certificate as a text file called trust txt 2 Install the trusted CA certificate for the Trusted Root CA a Log in to the FWG114P v2 b From the main menu VPN section click on the CA s link c Click Add to adda CA d Click Browse to locate the trust txt file e Click Upload 3 Create a certificate request for the FWG114P v2 a From the main menu VPN section click the Certificates link 8 26 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 b Click the Generate Request button to display the screen illustrated in Figure 8 17 below Generate Self Certificate Request Required Name FWG114P Subject test Hash Algorithm Signature Algorithm Signature Key Length Optional IP Address Domain Name E mail Address Figure 8 17 Generate Self Certificate Request menu c Fill in the fields on the Add Self Certificate screen e Required Name Enter a name to identify this certificate Subject This is the name which other organizati
179. e up to four 128 bit WEP Keys but some 802 11 client adapters can only store one Therefore make sure that your 802 11 access and client adapters configurations match E 6 Wireless Networking Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 WEP Configuration Options The WEP settings must match on all 802 11 devices that are within the same wireless network as identified by the SSID In general if your mobile clients will roam between access points then all of the 802 11 access points and all of the 802 11 client adapters on the network must have the same WEP settings Note Whatever keys you enter for an AP you must also enter the same keys for the client adapter in the same order In other words WEP key 1 on the AP must match WEP key 1 on the client adapter WEP key 2 on the AP must match WEP key 2 on the client adapter and so on Note The AP and the client adapters can have different default WEP Keys as long as the keys are in the same order In other words the AP can use WEP key 2 as its default key to transmit while a client adapter can use WEP key 3 as its default key to transmit The two devices will communicate as long as the AP s WEP key 2 is the same as the client s WEP key 2 and the AP s WEP key 3 is the same as the client s WEP key 3 Wireless Channels The wireless frequencies used by 802 11b g networks are discussed below IEEE
180. ections From the Exchange Mode drop down box select Main Mode From the Local Identity drop down box select WAN IP Address WAN IP address will automatically be populated into the Local Identity Data field after policy is applied From the Remote Identity drop down box select Remote WAN IP WAN IP address will automatically be populated into the Local Identity Data field after policy is applied NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 G 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 IKE SA Parameters Eneryptian Algorithm DES Authentication Algorithm MD5 Authentication Method Pre shared Key hrSxb8416aa9 6 C RSA Signature requires Certificate Diffie Hellman DH Group Group 1 768 Bit v SA Life Time 28800 secs Back Cancel Figure G 6 NETGEAR FVS328 IKE Policy Configuration Part 2 From the Encryption Algorithm drop down box select 3DES From the Authentication Algorithm drop down box select MDS From the Authentication Method radio button select Pre shared Key In the Pre Shared Key field type hr5xb84l6aa9r6 You must make sure the key is the same for both gateways From the Diffie Hellman DH Group drop down box select Group 1 768 Bit Inthe SA Life Time field type 28800 3 Click the Apply Button This will bring you back to the IKE Policies Menu
181. ed on the Radius server e Radius Accounting Enable Radius Accounting Enable this if you want to use the Radius Accounting system If enabled the following fields must be correct e Radius Accounting Port Enter the port number used for Accounting data on the Radius Server e Update Report Enable this if you wish to have this AP send Accounting update messages to the Radius accounting server periodically If enabled enter the desired Update Report interval in the field provided 5 Click Apply to save your settings How to Configure WPA PSK Note Not all wireless adapters support WPA Furthermore client software is required on the client Windows XP and Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 do include the client software that supports WPA Nevertheless the wireless adapter hardware and driver must also support WPA Consult the product document for your wireless adapter and WPA client software for instructions on configuring WPA settings To configure WPA PSK follow these steps 1 Log in at the default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with the default user name of admin and default password of password or using whatever LAN address and password you have set up 4 18 Wireless Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 Click Wireless Settings in the main menu of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name SSID NE
182. ed security is enhanced by ensuring that the key is changed at regular intervals Also even if one key is broken subsequent keys are no easier to break Each key has no relationship to the previous key PFS Key Group If PFS is enabled this setting determines the DH group bit size used in the key exchange This must match the value used on the remote gateway Virtual Private Networking 8 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table 8 1 VPN Auto Policy Configuration Fields Field Description Traffic Selector Local IP These settings determine if and when a VPN tunnel will be established If network traffic meets all criteria then a VPN tunnel will be created The drop down menu allows you to configure the source IP address of the outbound network traffic for which this VPN policy will provide security Usually this address will be from your network address space The choices are Default ANY for all valid IP addresses in the Internet address space Note Selecting ANY means all traffic goes through the IPSec tunnel and prevents access to the Internet e Single IP Address e Range of IP Addresses e Subnet Address Remote IP The drop down menu allows you to configure the destination IP address of the outbound network traffic for which this VPN policy will provide security Usually this address will be from the remo
183. ed the following fields must be correct e Radius Accounting Port Enter the port number used for Accounting data on the Radius Server e Update Report Enable this if you wish to have this AP send Accounting update messages to the Radius accounting server periodically If enabled enter the desired Update Report interval in the field provided 5 Click Apply to save your settings How to Configure WPA2 with Radius Note Not all wireless adapters support WPA2 Furthermore client software is required on the client Windows XP and Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 do include the client software that supports WPA2 Nevertheless the wireless adapter hardware and driver must also support WPA2 Consult the product document for your wireless adapter and WPA2 client software for instructions on configuring WPA2 settings To configure WPA2 with Radius follow these steps 1 Log in at the default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with the default user name of admin and default password of password or using whatever LAN address and password you have set up 4 14 Wireless Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 Click Wireless Settings in the main menu of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name SSID NETGEAR Region Select Region Channel 10 2 457G z gt Current Channel No 10 2 457GHz Mode gandb Wir
184. ed manually or by passphrase e Wireless access can be restricted by MAC Address 9 2 Introduction 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Wireless network name broadcast can be turned off so that only devices that have the network name SSID can connect Virtual Private Networking The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server provides a secure encrypted connection between your local network and remote networks or clients Its VPN features include e Support for up to 2 simultaneous VPN connections e Support for industry standard VPN protocols The ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 supports standard keying methods Manual or IKE standard authentication methods MD5 and SHA 1 and standard encryption methods DES 3DES It is compatible with many other VPN products e Support for up to 168 bit encryption 3DES for maximum security e Support for VPN Main Mode Aggressive mode or Manual Keying e Support for Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN configuration when the Dynamic DNS feature is enabled with one of the supported service providers Wireless Multimedia WMM Support WMM is a subset of the 802 11e standard WMM allows wireless traffic to have a range of priorities depending on the kind of data Time dependent information such as video or audio will have a higher priority than normal traffic For WMM to functio
185. ed sites SRC_INF LAN or WAN DST_INF WAN or LAN System Admin Sessions Administrator session logins and failed attempts are logged as well as manual or idle time logouts D 6 Firewall Log Formats 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The format is lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EVENT gt lt SRC_IP gt lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EVENT gt lt SRC_IP gt lt SRC_PORT gt lt DST_IP gt lt DST_PORT gt lt ACTION gt Fri 2003 12 05 21 07 43 Administrator login successful IP 192 168 0 10 Fri 2003 12 05 21 09 16 Administrator logout IP 192 168 0 10 Fri 2003 12 05 21 09 31 Administrator login fail Usernam rror IP 192 168 0 10 Fri 2003 12 05 21 09 25 Administrator login fail Password error IP 192 168 0 10 Fri 2003 12 05 21 16 15 Login screen timed out IP 192 168 0 10 Fri 2003 12 05 21 07 43 Administrator Interface Connecting TCP Source 192 168 0 10 2440 Destination 192 168 0 1 80 Receive Notes ACTION Receive or Drop Policy Administration LOG lt DATE gt lt TIME gt lt EVENT gt lt DIRECTION gt lt SERVICE gt lt DESCRIPTION gt Fri 2003 12 05 21 48 41 Administrator Action Inbound Policy to Service BGP is Added Fri 2003 12 05 21 49 41 Administrator Action Outbound Poli
186. ed to access the router s remote management Note For enhanced security restrict access to as few external IP addresses as practical a To allow access from any IP address on the Internet select Everyone 10 10 Advanced Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 b To allow access from a range of IP addresses on the Internet select IP address range Enter a beginning and ending IP address to define the allowed range c To allow access from a single IP address on the Internet select Only this computer Enter the IP address that will be allowed access 3 Specify the Port Number that will be used for accessing the management interface Web browser access normally uses the standard HTTP service port 80 For greater security you can change the remote management Web interface to a custom port by entering that number in the box provided Choose a number between 1024 and 65535 but do not use the number of any common service port The default is 8080 which is a common alternate for HTTP 4 Click Apply to have your changes take effect Note When accessing your router from the Internet you will type your router s WAN IP address into your browser s Address in IE or Location in Netscape box followed by a colon and the custom port number For example if your external address is 134 177 0 123 and you use port number 8080 you must enter
187. eer tai pH How to Configure WPA with adhe Sie BOS PE anaes EN PI E a hee How to Configure WPA2 with Radi E T E M E E How to Configure WPA and WPA2 with Radius EA E EEEE US How to Configure WPA PSK titania G48 How to Configure WPA2 PSK How to Configure WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Chapter 5 Serial Port Configuration Coniguninga Serial Part Modemi a svdaiiniscisioninnuiiniininn iAP e Basic Requirements for Serial Port Asda Configuration Ren reer error How to snare a Serial Port Modem stitutes 82 Basic Neree for Auto Rollover 53 How to Configure Auto Rollover 00 are vi Contents 201 10301 02 May 2005 Configuring Dial in on the Serial Port Basic Requirements for Dial in How to Configure Dial in Configuring LAN to LAN Settings TETA Basic SENE for LAN to LAN N Connections siaip Giap 6 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering Firewall Protection and Content Filtering Overview E E E E rr err E Using the Block Sites Menu to Screen Content cccccccscesecssecsseecsseecsseesseeesesesseesesO Services and Rules Regulate Inbound and Outbound Traffic eee eee 6 3 Defining a Service ixceddonins einer antes ssp cad tied nasa etic E rs Using jiboundOuibound Rules to Block or Allow er 6 4 Examples of Using Services and Rules to Regulate Traffic ccccccessseeeeesestteeeeeees 6 6 Inbound Rules Port FOnwardihg scccicciinncccccsnivscnsssonscccntessensnontri
188. el paths from one set of plugs to another the signals crossover If an eight wire cable was being used for instance the signal would start on pin one at one end of the cable and end up on pin eight at the other end They cross over from one side to the other CSMA CA Carrier Sense Multiple Action CSMA CA is the principle medium access method employed by IEEE 802 11 WLANs It is a listen before talk method of minimizing but not eliminating collisions caused by simultaneous transmission by multiple radios IEEE 802 11 states collision avoidance method rather than collision detection must be used because the standard employs half duplex radios radios capable of transmission or reception but not both simultaneously Unlike conventional wired Ethernet nodes a WLAN station cannot detect a collision while transmitting If a collision occurs the transmitting station will not receive an ACKnowledge packet from the intended receive station For this reason ACK packets have a higher priority than all other network traffic After completion of a data transmission the receive station will begin transmission of the ACK packet before any other node can begin transmitting a new data packet All other stations must wait a longer pseudo randomized period of time before transmitting If an ACK packet is not received the transmitting station will wait for a subsequent opportunity to retry transmission CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Action Collision
189. eld Secure Association Main Mode Perfect Forward Secrecy Enabled Disabled Encryption Protocol 3DES yj PreShared Key hr5xb8416aa9r6 Key Life 3600 Seconds IKE Life Time 28800 Seconds NETBIOS Enable Figure H 5 Figure 4 NETGEAR FVS318 VPN Settings part 2 Main Mode From the Secure Association drop down box select Main Mode Next to Perfect Forward Secrecy select the Enabled radio button From the Encryption Protocol drop down box select 3DES In the PreShared Key box type a unique text string to be used as the shared key between Gateway A and Gateway B In this example we used hr5xb84l6aa9r6 You must make sure the key is the same for both gateways Inthe Key Life box enter in 3600 seconds Inthe IKE Life Time enter 28800 seconds Check the NETBIOS Enable box if you wish to pass NetBIOS traffic over the VPN tunnel allowing functions such as Microsoft Network Neighborhood browsing 8 Click the Apply button in the lower center of the screen to save all changes and return to the VPN Settings screen 9 When the screen returns to the VPN Settings make sure the Enable check box is selected H 6 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Step By Step Configuration of FVS328 Gateway B 1 Log in to the NETGEAR FVS328 labeled Gate
190. eless Access Point M Enable Wireless Access Point M Allow Broadcast of Name SSID Wireless Station Access List Setup Access List Wireless Security WPA2 with Radius x Encryption AES 7 Radius Server Settings Primary Server Name IP Address Secondary Server NamellP Address Radius Port Shared Key Radius Accounting I Enable RADIUS Accounting Radius Accounting Port E Update Report every Minutes Apply Cancel Figure 4 7 Wireless Settings menu WPA2 with Radius 3 Select WPA2 with Radius on the pulldown menu The WPA2 with Radius menu will open Encryption There is no choice for encryption this is displayed for your information For WPA2 with Radius AES is used 4 Enter the Radius settings e Primary Server Name IP Address This field is required Enter the name or IP address of the primary Radius Server on your LAN Wireless Configuration 4 15 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Secondary Radius Server Name IP Address This field is optional If you have a Secondary Radius Server on your LAN enter its name or IP address here e Radius Port Enter the port number used for connecting to the Radius Server e Shared Key Enter the desired value for the Shared Key This must match the value used on the Radius server e Radius Accounting Enable Radius Accounting Enable this if you want to use the Radius Accounting s
191. enance 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Erasing the Configuration It is sometimes desirable to restore the router to a known blank condition This can be done by using the Erase function which will restore all factory settings After an erase the router s password will be password the LAN IP address will be 192 168 0 1 and the router s DHCP client will be enabled To erase the configuration click the Erase button To restore the factory default configuration settings without knowing the login password or IP address you must use the Default Reset button on the rear panel of the router See Restoring the Default Configuration and Password on page 11 7 Changing the Administrator Password The default password for the router s Web Configuration Manager is password Netgear recommends that you change this password to a more secure password From the main menu of the browser interface under the Maintenance heading select Set Password to bring up this menu Set Password Old Password Set Password Repeat New Password Administrator login times out after idle for 5 minutes Figure 9 6 Set Password menu To change the password first enter the old password and then enter the new password twice Click Apply To change the login idle timeout change the number of minutes and click Apply Maintenance 9 9 201 10301 02 May 2005
192. ence Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The ESP header is inserted into the packet between the IP header and any subsequent packet contents However because ESP encrypts the data the payload is changed ESP does not encrypt the ESP header nor does it encrypt the ESP authentication Authentication Header AH AH provides authentication and integrity which protect against data tampering using the same algorithms as ESP AH also provides optional anti replay protection which protects against unauthorized retransmission of packets The authentication header is inserted into the packet between the IP header and any subsequent packet contents The payload is not touched Although AH protects the packet s origin destination and contents from being tampered with the identity of the sender and receiver is known In addition AH does not protect the data s confidentiality If data is intercepted and only AH is used the message contents can be read ESP protects data confidentiality For added protection in certain cases AH and ESP can be used together In the following table IP HDR represents the IP header and includes both source and destination IP addresses Original Packet IP HDR TCP Data Packet with IPSec Authentication Header IP HDR TCP Data Authenticated Figure F 2 Original packet and packet with IPSec Authentication Header IKE Security Association IPSec introduces the
193. ents regarding loss and crosstalk In addition there are restrictions on maximum cable length for both 10 and 100 Mbits second networks B 12 Networks Routing and Firewall Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Inside Twisted Pair Cables For two devices to communicate the transmitter of each device must be connected to the receiver of the other device The crossover function is usually implemented internally as part of the circuitry in the device Computers and workstation adapter cards are usually media dependent interface ports called MDI or uplink ports Most repeaters and switch ports are configured as media dependent interfaces with built in crossover ports called MDI X or normal ports Auto Uplink technology automatically senses which connection MDI or MDI X is needed and makes the right connection Figure B 1 illustrates straight through twisted pair cable Key A UPLINK OR MDI PORT as on a PC B Normal or MDI X port as on a hub or switch 1 2 3 6 Pin numbers Figure B 1 Straight Through Twisted Pair Cable Figure B 2 illustrates crossover twisted pair cable Key B Normal or MDI X port as on a hub or switch 1 2 3 6 Pin numbers Figure B 2 Crossover Twisted Pair Cable Networks Routing and Firewall Basics B 13 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print
194. equired e Disable select this if you do not have a Syslog server e Broadcast on LAN the Syslog data is broadcast rather than sent to a specific Syslog server Use this if your Syslog Server does not have a fixed IP address e Send to this Syslog server IP address If your Syslog server has a fixed IP address select this option and enter the IP address of your Syslog server 6 18 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 201 10301 02 May 2005 Chapter 7 Print Server This chapter describes how to install and configure the print server in your ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Printing Options The FWG114P v2 supports these methods for printing For Windows XP and 2000 Only TCP IP Line Printer Remote LPR Printing No software needs to be installed Windows XP or 2000 users can print directly to the firewall Print jobs are spooled queued on each computer The computer sends the print job directly to the LAN IP address of the FWG114P v2 For Windows 95 98 Me NT4 0 2000 and XP Netgear Printer Port Driver Install the Netgear Printer Port Driver on Each computer After installing the Print Port Driver from the Resource CD for the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P SW 10023 03 Windows users can print directly to the firewall Print jobs are spooled queued on each computer For Macintosh computers LPR printing No software needs to b
195. equirements To use the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server on your network each computer must have an installed Ethernet Network Interface Card NIC and an Ethernet cable If the computer will connect to your network at 100 Mbps you must use a Category 5 CATS cable such as the one provided with your router Computer Network Configuration Requirements The FWG114P v2 includes a built in Web Configuration Manager To access the configuration menus on the FWG114P v2 you must use a Java enabled Web browser program that supports HTTP uploads such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator Use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator versions 4 0 or above Free browser programs are readily available for Windows Macintosh or UNIX Linux Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 For the initial connection to the Internet and configuration of your router you will need to connect a computer to the router that is set to automatically get its TCP IP configuration from the router via DHCP The cable or DSL modem broadband access device must provide a standard 10 Mbps LOBASE T Ethernet interface Internet Configuration Requirements Depending on how your ISP set up your Internet account you might need one or more of these configuration parameters to connect your router to the Internet e Host and Doma
196. er port driver from operating install your FWG114P v2 To disable the Epson Spool Manager run the b Connect your printer to the USB port on Epson Spool Manager select Queue Setup the back of the FWG114P v2 from the menu click Use Print Manager for this port and click OK to exit c Insert the Resource CD for the p FWG114P v2 into the CD ROM drive of mP ETEY a computer connected to the FWG114P 2 PWG 14 v2 The CD main page shown at the right will load d Click the Print Server button Follow the instructions for running the z setup utility FWG114P v2 Resource CD A Welcome to the NETGEAR ProSafe Firewall Router Print Server Setup program This program will install NETGEAR ProSafe Firewall Router Print Server on your computer t r strongly recommen that you exit all Windows programs Fi efore running us Setup program e Click Next to proceed through the Shc Canela gut Setup ard then cose ary programs you Netgear Printer Port Installation Wizard E O ea S S R steps WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Note Windows 2000 or XP may require peen e i may iesit n soere cv andcamnlpegine ard you to be logged on with administrator will De prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law rights J Cancel Netgear Printer Port Installation Wizard 7 6 Print Server 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2
197. ers Serial Connection Firewall B Firewall A Figure 5 4 LAN to LAN network configuration Basic Requirements for LAN to LAN Connections Serial port LAN to LAN configurations require these elements 1 An ISDN or analog phone line with an active ISDN or dial up ISP account 2 A serial modem properly configured and attached to the DB9 connector on the serial port 3 A broadband connection to one FWG114P v2 for LAN to LAN auto rollover Internet access 4 The LAN to LAN settings configured and applied to the two FWG114P v2 wireless firewall print servers How to Configure LAN to LAN Connections Follow these steps to configure a serial port LAN to LAN connection 1 Configure a serial port modem 2 From the main menu click LAN to LAN in the Serial Port section 5 6 Serial Port Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005M 10207 01 Reference Manual v2 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 LAN to LAN Enable Serial Port LAN to LAN function Remote Gateway LAN IP address Network Mask CI Disconnect after Idle Time of 0 minutes C Use LAN to LAN connection for Internet access if Internet Port fails Incoming Connection Enable Incoming connection Login Name Login Password Authentication Outgoing Connection Enable Outgoing connection Telephone Login Name Login Password Figure 5 5 LAN to LAN configuration menu 3 Configure th
198. es Remote VPN Endpoint The WAN Internet IP address of the remote VPN firewall or client to which you wish to connect The remote VPN endpoint must have this FWG114P v2 s WAN Internet IP address entered as its Remote VPN Endpoint Traffic Selector These settings determine if and when a VPN tunnel will be established If network traffic meets all criteria then a VPN tunnel will be created Local IP The drop down menu allows you to configure the source IP address of the outbound network traffic for which this VPN policy will provide security Usually this address will be from your network address space The choices are ANY for all valid IP addresses in the Internet address space Note Selecting ANY means all traffic goes through the IPSec tunnel and prevents access to the Internet e Single IP Address e Range of IP Addresses e Subnet Address Remote IP The drop down menu allows you to configure the destination IP address of the outbound network traffic for which this VPN policy will provide security Usually this address will be from the remote site s corporate network address space The choices are ANY for all valid IP addresses in the Internet address space Note Selecting ANY means all traffic goes through the IPSec tunnel and prevents access to the Internet e Single IP Address e Range of IP Addresses e Subnet Address Authenticating Header AH AH specifies the authentication protocol for the VPN header These Conf
199. es are not available to the Internet through the translated connection All incoming inquiries are filtered out by the router This filtering can prevent intruders from probing your system However using port forwarding you can allow one PC for example a Web server on your local network to be accessible to outside users B 8 Networks Routing and Firewall Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 MAC Addresses and Address Resolution Protocol An IP address alone cannot be used to deliver data from one LAN device to another To send data between LAN devices you must convert the IP address of the destination device to its media access control MAC address Each device on an Ethernet network has a unique MAC address which is a 48 bit number assigned to each device by the manufacturer The technique that associates the IP address with a MAC address is known as address resolution Internet Protocol uses the Address Resolution Protocol ARP to resolve MAC addresses If a device sends data to another station on the network and the destination MAC address is not yet recorded ARP is used An ARP request is broadcast onto the network All stations on the network receive and read the request The destination IP address for the chosen station is included as part of the message so that only the station with this IP address responds to the ARP request All other statio
200. ess of the router while connected through the browser you will be disconnected You must then open a new connection to the new IP address and log in again gt 10 6 Advanced Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Using the Router as a DHCP server By default the router will function as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server allowing it to assign IP DNS server and default gateway addresses to all computers connected to the router s LAN The assigned default gateway address is the LAN address of the router IP addresses will be assigned to the attached PCs from a pool of addresses specified in this menu Each pool address is tested before it is assigned to avoid duplicate addresses on the LAN For most applications the default DHCP and TCP IP settings of the router are satisfactory If another device on your network will be the DHCP server or if you will manually configure the network settings of all of your computers clear the Use router as DHCP server check box Otherwise leave it checked Specify the pool of IP addresses to be assigned by setting the Starting IP Address and Ending IP Address These addresses should be part of the same IP address subnet as the router s LAN IP address Using the default addressing scheme you should define a range between 192 168 0 2 and 192 168 0 253 although you may wish
201. everal features designed to maintain security as described in this section e PCs hidden by NAT NAT opens a temporary path to the Internet for requests originating from the local network Requests originating from outside the LAN are discarded preventing users outside the LAN from finding and directly accessing the PCs on the LAN e Port forwarding with NAT Although NAT prevents Internet locations from directly accessing the PCs on the LAN the router allows you to direct incoming traffic to specific PCs based on the service port number of the incoming request or to one designated DNS host computer You can specify forwarding of single ports or ranges of ports Autosensing Ethernet Connections with Auto Uplink With its internal 8 port 10 100 switch the FWG114P v2 can connect to either a 10 Mbps standard Ethernet network or a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet network Both the LAN and WAN interfaces are autosensing and capable of full duplex or half duplex operation The router incorporates Auto Uplink technology Each Ethernet port will automatically sense whether the Ethernet cable plugged into the port should have a normal connection such as to a computer or an uplink connection such as to a switch or hub That port will then configure itself to the correct configuration This feature also eliminates the need to worry about crossover cables as Auto Uplink will accommodate either type of cable to make the right connection
202. ew the order of the wire colors on each On a straight through cable the color order will be the same on both connectors On a crossover cable the orange and blue pairs will be exchanged from one connector to the other B 14 Networks Routing and Firewall Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server incorporates Auto Uplink technology also called MDI MDIX Each LOCAL Ethernet port will automatically sense whether the Ethernet cable plugged into the port should have a normal connection e g connecting to a PC or an uplink connection e g connecting to a router switch or hub That port will then configure itself to the correct configuration This feature also eliminates the need to worry about crossover cables as Auto Uplink will accommodate either type of cable to make the right connection Networks Routing and Firewall Basics B 15 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 B 16 Networks Routing and Firewall Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Appendix C Preparing Your Network This appendix describes how to prepare your network to connect to the Internet through the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 and how to verify the readiness of broadband Internet service from an Internet service provider
203. f the current 802 11i draft and uses certain pieces of the 802 111 draft that are ready to bring to market today such as 802 1x and TKIP The main pieces of the 802 111 draft that are not included in WPA are secure IBSS Ad Hoc mode secure fast handoff for specialized 802 11 VoIP phones as well as enhanced encryption protocols such as AES CCMP These features are either not yet ready for market or will require hardware upgrades to implement What are the Key Features of WPA Security The following security features are included in the WPA standard e WPA Authentication e WPA Encryption Key Management Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Michael message integrity code MIC AES Support to be phased in e Support for a Mixture of WPA and WEP Wireless Clients but mixing WEP and WPA is discouraged These features are discussed below WPA addresses most of the known WEP vulnerabilities and is primarily intended for wireless infrastructure networks as found in the enterprise This infrastructure includes stations access points and authentication servers typically RADIUS servers The RADIUS server holds or has access to user credentials for example user names and passwords and authenticates wireless users before they gain access to the network The strength of WPA comes from an integrated sequence of operations that encompass 802 1X EAP authentication and sophisticated key management and encryption techniques Its
204. fault rules By adding custom rules you can block or allow access based on the service or application source or destination IP addresses and time of day You can also choose to log traffic that matches or does not match the rule you have defined To create a new rule click the Add button To edit an existing rule select its button on the left side of the table and click Edit To delete an existing rule select its button on the left side of the table and click Delete To move an existing rule to a different position in the table select its button on the left side of the table and click Move At the script prompt enter the number of the desired new position and click OK An example of the menu for defining or editing a rule is shown in Figure 6 3 The parameters are Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 6 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Service From this list select the application or service to be allowed or blocked The list already displays many common services but you are not limited to these choices Use the Services menu to add any additional services or applications that do not already appear e Action Choose how you would like this type of traffic to be handled You can block or allow always or you can choose to block or allow according to the schedule you have defined in the Schedule menu e Source Address Specify traffic orig
205. ggressive Mode Fully Qualified Domain Name FVS328 Fully Qualified Domain Name S VPNclient 3DES w SHAT Pre shared Key hr5xb84l6aa9r6 RSA Signature requires Certificate Group 2 1024 Bi 7 s6400 _ secs Back Apply Cancel Figure 8 23 NETGEAR FWG114P v2 IKE Policy Configuration Enter a descriptive name for the policy in the Policy Name field This name is not supplied to the remote VPN endpoint It is used to help you manage the IKE policies In our example we used VPNclient as the Policy Name From the Direction Type drop down box select Remote Access From the Exchange Mode drop down box select Aggressive Mode This will also be selected in the VPN Client My Identity ID Type fields as seen in Security Policy on page 8 41 From the Local Identity drop down box select Fully Qualified Domain Name the actual WAN IP address of the FWG114P v2 will also be used in the Connection ID Type fields of the VPN Client as seen in Security Policy Editor New Connection on page 8 39 For this example we typed FWG114P v2 in the Local Identity Data field 8 34 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 From the Remote Identity drop down box select Fully Qualified Domain Name Type VPNclient in the Remote Identity Data This will also be entered in the VPN Client M
206. guration your can test your Internet connection Log in to the firewall then from the Setup Basic Settings link click the Test button If the NETGEAR Web site does not appear within one minute refer to Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Note Popup blocking software may block the test page from opening Alternately you can just open a new browser window and browse the Internet To access the Internet from any computer connected to your firewall launch a browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator You should see the firewall s Internet LED blink indicating communication to the ISP The browser should begin to display a Web page Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 17 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Manually Configuring Your Internet Connection You can manually configure your firewall using the menu below or you can allow the Setup Wizard to determine your configuration as described in the previous section ISP Does Not Require Login Basic Settings e of Internet Connection do you have Broadband No login Broadband with Login username password O Serial Port Modem or ISDN Account Name If Required Domain Name if Required NAT Network Address Translation Enable Disable Internet IP Address Get Dynamically From ISP Use Static IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Ma
207. he printer using the standard Windows tools as follows a From Start gt Settings open the Printers folder and start the Add Printer Wizard b When prompted select Network Printer and click Next 7 12 Print Server 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 c For Network Path or Queue enter a dummy value such as 123 as shown below Select NO for Do you print from MS DOS based programs Add Printer Wizard Type the network path or the queue name of pour printer If you dont know its name cick Browse to view available network printers Network path of quaue name Browse Do you print from MS DDS based programs e Yes No esi d Click Next Figure 7 2 Windows Add Printer Wizard e The printer wizard will display a message stating that The Network Printer is off line This is OK Continue the Add Printer Wizard until finished f When finished go to Start gt Settings gt Printers The new printer icon will be grayed out indicating the printer is not ready Print Server 7 13 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 g Right click the new printer and select Properties Then select the Details tab as shown below a file Edt View Help Add Parter Forts Device Options PostSenpt General Details p Graphics 2
208. he printer you connected to the USB port on the FWG114P v2 Click Next to proceed If the printer software is already installed on this PC the Add Printer Wizard will inform you and let you keep the existing driver b Be sure to select the FWG114P_P1 port in the Add Printer Wizard Click Next c The Name Your Printer screen prompts for a descriptive name and if you want it to be the default Enter your choices If prompted about Sharing do not enable Sharing Click Next to proceed and finish the Add Printer Wizard steps re f Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an e p installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers Epson Stylus Pro ESC P 2 Epson Stylus Pro XL ESC P 2 Epson Stylus Pro XL ESC P 2 Epson T 750 Cancel Windows Add Printer Wizard If you do not see your make and model printer in the lists and you are connected to the Internet you can click the Windows Update button to download additional printer software from the Microsoft Web site or you can click the Have Disk button to install the printer software from a disk you have Click the port you want to use with this printer and then click Next Available ports Communications Port Communications Port Unknown local port Creates a file on disk 14P P1 NETGEAR FR Print Server EPSON Printer Port
209. ick Serial Port Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 15 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Basic Settings What type of Internet Connection do you have Broadband No login Broadband with Login username password Serial Port Modem or ISDN Dial up Account AccountUser Name Password Telephone Alternative Telephone Connect as required C Disconnect after Idle Time of 5 min Internet IP Address Get Dynamically From ISP Use Static IP Address DNS IP Address Get Automatically From ISP Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS Secondary DNS Modem Serial Line Speed 115200 bps Modem Type Standard Modem Figure 3 12 Serial Internet Connection configuration menu c Fill in the ISDN or analog ISP Internet configuration parameters as appropriate e Fora Dial up Account enter the Account information Check Connect as required to enable the firewall to automatically dial the number To enable Idle Time disconnect check the box and enter a time in minutes e To configure the Internet IP settings fill in the address parameters your ISP provided d Configure the Modem parameters 3 16 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Note You can validate modem str
210. iguration settings must match the remote VPN endpoint Note The Incoming settings here must match the Outgoing settings on the remote VPN endpoint and the Outgoing settings here must match the Incoming settings on the remote VPN endpoint Virtual Private Networking 8 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table 8 1 VPN Manual Policy Configuration Fields Field Description SPI Incoming Enter a Hex value 3 8 chars Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Outgoing SPI field SPI Outgoing Enter a Hex value 3 8 chars Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Incoming SPI field Enable Authentication Use this checkbox to enable or disable AH Authentication is often not used In this case leave the checkbox unchecked Authentication If you enable AH then select the authentication algorithm Algorithm e MD5 is the default e SHA1 is more secure Enter the keys in the fields provided For MD5 the keys should be 16 characters For SHA 1 the keys should be 20 characters Key In Enter the keys For MD5 the keys should be 16 characters e For SHA 1 the keys should be 20 characters Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Authentication Algorithm Key Out field Key Ou
211. ile menu at the top of the Security Policy Editor window select Save After you have configured and saved the VPN client information your PC will automatically open the VPN connection when you attempt to access any IP addresses in the range of the remote VPN router s LAN Note Whenever you make changes to a Security Policy save them first then deactivate the security policy reload the security policy and finally activate the security policy This ensures that your new settings will take effect gt 8 44 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Testing the VPN Connection You can test the VPN connection in several ways e From the client PC to the FWG114P v2 e From the FWG114P v2 to the client PC These procedures are explained below gt Note Virus protection or firewall software can interfere with VPN communications Be sure such software is not running on the remote PC with the Netgear ProSafe VPN Client and that the firewall features of the FWG114P v2 are not set in such a way as to prevent VPN communications From the Client PC to the FWG114P v2 To check the VPN Connection you can initiate a request from the remote PC to the FWG114P v2 by using the Connect option of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server popup menu 1 Open the popup menu by right clicking on the syste
212. in Names e ISP login name and password e ISP Domain Name Server DNS Addresses e Fixed IP address which is also known as static IP address Where Do Get the Internet Configuration Parameters There are several ways you can gather the required Internet connection information e Your ISP provides all the information needed to connect to the Internet If you cannot locate this information you can ask your ISP to provide it or you can try one of the options below e If you have a computer already connected using the active Internet access account you can gather the configuration information from that computer For Windows 95 98 ME open the Network control panel select the TCP IP entry for the Ethernet adapter and click Properties Record all the settings for each tab page For Windows 2000 XP open the Local Area Network Connection select the TCP IP entry for the Ethernet adapter and click Properties Record all the settings for each tab page For Macintosh computers open the TCP IP or Network control panel Record all the settings for each section e You may also refer to the FWG 4P v2 Resource CD for the NETGEAR Router ISP Guide which provides Internet connection information for many ISPs Once you locate your Internet configuration parameters you may want to record them on the following form 3 2 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wirele
213. in your browser http 134 177 0 123 8080 Using Universal Plug and Play UPnP Universal Plug and Play UPnP helps devices such as Internet appliances and computers access the network and connect to other devices as needed UPnP devices can automatically discover the services from other registered UPnP devices on the network UPnP Turn UPnP On Advertisement Period in minutes 30 Advertisement Time To Live in haps lo UPnP Portmap Table Active Protocol Int Port Ext Port IP Address Yes TCP 9198 11913 192 168 0 2 Yes UDP 5339 7102 192 168 0 2 Apply Cancel Jl Refresh Figure 10 4 UPnP Menu Advanced Configuration 10 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Turn UPnP On UPnP can be enabled or disabled for automatic device configuration The default setting for UPnP is enabled If disabled the router will not allow any device to automatically control the resources such as port forwarding mapping of the router Advertisement Period The Advertisement Period is how often the router will broadcast its UPnP information This value can range from 1 to 1440 minutes The default period is 30 minutes Shorter durations will ensure that control points have current device status at the expense of additional network traffic Longer durations may compromise the freshness of the device status but can significantly reduce netwo
214. inating on the LAN outbound or the WAN inbound and choose whether you would like the traffic to be restricted by source IP address You can select Any a Single address or a Range If you select a range of addresses enter the range in the start and finish boxes If you select a single address enter it in the start box e Destination Address The Destination Address will be assumed to be from the opposite LAN or WAN of the Source Address As with the Source Address you can select Any a Single address or a Range unless NAT is enabled and the destination is the LAN In that case you must enter a Single LAN address in the start box e Log You can select whether the traffic will be logged The choices are Never no log entries will be made for this service Match traffic of this type which matches the parameters and action will be logged Examples of Using Services and Rules to Regulate Traffic Use the examples to see how you combine Services and Rules to regulate how the TCP IP protocols are used on your firewall to enable either blocking or allowing specific Internet traffic on your wireless firewall print server Inbound Rules Port Forwarding Because the FWG114P v2 uses Network Address Translation NAT your network presents only one IP address to the Internet and outside users cannot directly address any of your local computers However by defining an inbound rule also known as port forwarding you can make a loc
215. ing data Using keys ensures that only the sender and receiver of a message can access it IPSec requires that keys be re created or refreshed frequently so that the parties can communicate securely with each other IKE manages the process of refreshing keys however a user can control the key strength and the refresh frequency Refreshing keys on a regular basis ensures data confidentiality between sender and receiver Understand the Process Before You Begin This document provides case studies on how to configure secure IPSec VPN tunnels This document assumes the reader has a working knowledge of NETGEAR management systems NETGEAR is a member of the VPN Consortium a group formed to facilitate IPSec VPN vendor interoperability The VPN Consortium has developed specific scenarios to aid system administrators in the often confusing process of connecting two different vendor implementations of the IPSec standard The case studies in this appendix follow the addressing and configuration mechanics defined by the VPN Consortium Additional information regarding inter vendor interoperability may be found at hitp www vpnc org interop html It is a good idea to gather all the necessary information required to establish a VPN before you begin the configuration process You should understand whether the firmware is up to date all of the addresses that will be necessary and all of the parameters that need to be set on both sides Try to understan
216. ing settings by first connecting the modem directly to a computer establishing a connection to your ISP and then copying the modem string settings from the computer configuration and pasting them into the FWG114P v2 Modem Properties Initial String field For more information on this procedure please refer to the support area of the NETGEAR Web site e Select the Serial Line Speed This is the maximum speed the modem will attempt to use For ISDN permanent connections the speeds are typically 64000 or 128000 bps For dial up modems 56000 bps would be a typical setting e Select the Modem Type For ISDN select Permanent connection leased line For dial up select your modem from the list Standard Modem should work in most cases If your modem is not on the list select User Defined and enter the Modem Properties Note If you are using the User Defined Modem Type you must first use the Serial Port menu Modem link to fill in the Modem Properties settings for your modem e Click Apply to save your settings 3 Connect to the Internet to test your configuration a If you have a broadband connection disconnect it b From a workstation open a browser and test your serial port Internet connection Note The response time of your serial port Internet connection will be slower than a broadband Internet connection Testing Your Internet Connection After completing the Internet connection confi
217. int Server The latency data throughput performance and notebook power consumption also vary depending on your configuration choices For best results place your wireless firewall print server e Near the center of the area in which your PCs will operate e Inan elevated location such as a high shelf where the wirelessly connected PCs have line of sight access even if through walls The best location is elevated such as wall mounted or on the top of a cubicle and at the center of your wireless coverage area for all the mobile devices e Away from sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and 2 4 GHz cordless phones e Away from large metal surfaces Be aware that the time it takes to establish a wireless connection can vary depending on both your security settings and placement WEP connections can take slightly longer to establish Also WEP encryption can consume more battery power on a notebook computer Wireless Configuration 4 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Implementing Appropriate Wireless Security Note Indoors computers can connect to wireless networks at ranges of 300 feet or more Such distances allow others outside of your area to access your network Unlike wired network data your wireless data transmissions can extend beyond your walls and can be received by anyone with a compatible adapter For this
218. ion None 4 Pi 11 Pa EREIN Phase 2 V Encapsulation Protocol ESP GB Encrypt Alg Triple DES kd Qs Other Connections Hash Alg SHA m Encapsulation Tunnel z I Authentication Protocol 4H Tumne zd Figure 8 32 Connection Security Policy Key Exchange Phase 2 b Configure the Key Exchange Phase 2 e Expand the Key Exchange Phase 2 heading and click on Proposal 1 e For this example ensure that the following settings are configured Inthe SA Life menu select Unspecified Inthe Compression menu select None Check the Encapsulation Protocol ESP check box Inthe Encrypt Alg menu select Triple DES Inthe Hash Alg select SHA 1 Inthe Encapsulation menu select Tunnel Virtual Private Networking 8 43 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 6 Configure the Global Policy Settings a From the Options menu at the top of the Security Policy Editor window select Global Policy Settings Global Policy Settings Retransmit Interval seconds Number of retries V Send status notifications to peer hosts Enable IPSec Logging Smart card removal clears keys Figure 8 33 Security Policy Editor Global Policy Options b Increase the Retransmit Interval period to 45 seconds c Select the Allow to Specify Internal Network Address check box and click OK 7 Save the VPN Client Settings From the F
219. ireless devices operate in an Open System network Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP data encryption is used when the wireless devices are configured to operate in Shared Key authentication mode 802 11 Authentication The 802 11 standard defines several services that govern how two 802 11 devices communicate The following events must occur before an 802 11 Station can communicate with an Ethernet network through an access point such as the one built in to the FWG114P v2 1 Turn on the wireless station The station listens for messages from any access points that are in range The station finds a message from an access point that has a matching SSID The station sends an authentication request to the access point The access point authenticates the station The station sends an association request to the access point The access point associates with the station oc ND MR WN The station can now communicate with the Ethernet network through the access point An access point must authenticate a station before the station can associate with the access point or communicate with the network The IEEE 802 11 standard defines two types of authentication Open System and Shared Key e Open System Authentication allows any device to join the network assuming that the device SSID matches the access point SSID Alternatively the device can use the ANY SSID option to associate with any available Access Point within range regardless of it
220. isted and should match the values below if you are using the default TCP IP settings that NETGEAR recommends e The IP address is between 192 168 0 2 and 192 168 0 254 e The subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 e The default gateway is 192 168 0 1 4 Type exit Configuring the Macintosh for TCP IP Networking Beginning with Macintosh Operating System 7 TCP IP is already installed on the Macintosh On each networked Macintosh you will need to configure TCP IP to use DHCP MacOS 8 6 or 9 x 1 From the Apple menu select Control Panels then TCP IP C 6 Preparing Your Network 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The TCP IP Control Panel opens o TCP IP a Connect via Ethernet Setup Configure Using DHCP Server IP Address lt willbe supplied by server gt Subnet mask lt willbe supplied by server gt Router address lt will be supplied by server gt Search domains Name server addr lt will be supplied by server gt 12 2 From the Connect via box select your Macintosh s Ethernet interface 3 From the Configure box select Using DHCP Server You can leave the DHCP Client ID box empty 4 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 5 Repeat this for each Macintosh on your network MacOS X 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences then Network 2
221. iver that supports WPA For wireless network adapter drivers that are compatible with Windows XP Service Pack 1 and Windows Server 2003 the updated network adapter driver must be able to pass the adapter s WPA capabilities and security configuration to the Wireless Zero Configuration service Wireless Networking Basics E 17 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Microsoft has worked with many wireless vendors to embed the WPA firmware update in the wireless adapter driver So to update your Microsoft Windows wireless client all you have to do is obtain the new WPA compatible driver and install the driver The firmware is automatically updated when the wireless network adapter driver is loaded in Windows Changes to Wireless Client Programs Wireless client programs must be updated to permit the configuration of WPA authentication and preshared key and the new WPA encryption algorithms TKIP and the optional AES component To obtain the Microsoft WPA client program visit the Microsoft Web site E 18 Wireless Networking Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Appendix F Virtual Private Networking There have been many improvements in the Internet including Quality of Service network performance and inexpensive technologies such as DSL But one of the most important advances has been in Virtual Private Networking VPN Internet Protocol security IPSec IP
222. jacent area thereto and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Data Processing Equipment and Electronic Office Machines aimed at preventing radio interference in such residential areas When used near a radio or TV receiver it may become the cause of radio interference Read instructions for correct handling Product and Publication Details Model Number FWG114P v2 Publication Date May 2005 Product Family wireless access point Product Name ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Home or Business Product Business Language English Publication Part Number 201 10301 02 iil 201 10301 02 May 2005 201 10301 02 May 2005 Contents Chapter 1 About This Manual Audience Scope Conventions and Formats cccccccccesssseeeceesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeea 1 1 Pee Te Use This Manwal sirsenis aaa aaa ai Oai 1 2 How DFii mS MAng manaon o o o AEE 1 3 Chapter 2 Introduction Key Fealres of the PUTTAR VA scccccsccdeiccccascctdincssnsnsdoentmtariatacoideesimnanieegakecenaueeinuncantads 2 1 Full Routing on Both the Broadband and Serial Ports ccccessecsssssesseeeesseneeees 2 2 802 11g and 802 11b Wireless Networking ci sdsccecciadadeeebacadeeoetuanisedesiaiausetetin dacs 2 2 Virtual Private NetWork ssricsniosiii arsons a a a 2 3 Wireless Multimedia WMM Support ccsccccesencesescecesccesesaseseaaeesennesenaeeersensees 2 3 A Powerful
223. just prove that no single security tactic is completely invulnerable WPA is a definite step forward in WLAN security over WEP and has to be thought of as a single part of an end to end network security strategy Product Support for WPA Starting in August 2003 NETGEAR Inc wireless Wi Fi certified products will support the WPA standard NETGEAR Inc wireless products that had their Wi Fi certification approved before August 2003 will have one year to add WPA so as to maintain their Wi Fi certification WPA requires software changes to the following e Wireless access points e Wireless network adapters e Wireless client programs Supporting a Mixture of WPA and WEP Wireless Clients is Discouraged To support the gradual transition of WEP based wireless networks to WPA a wireless AP can support both WEP and WPA clients at the same time During the association the wireless AP determines which clients use WEP and which clients use WPA The disadvantage to supporting a mixture of WEP and WPA clients is that the global encryption key is not dynamic This is because WEP based clients cannot support it All other benefits to the WPA clients such as integrity are maintained However a mixed mode supporting WPA and non WPA clients would offer network security that is no better than that obtained with a non WPA network and thus this mode of operation is discouraged E 16 Wireless Networking Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference
224. k Next install your FWG114P v2 Connect your printer to the USB port on the back of the FWG114P v2 b From the Windows Start menu of a Add Printer Wizard computer connected to the FWG114P TAPEET v2 click Printers and Faxes The wizard needs to know which type of printer to set up Q c Click Add a printer Click Next to proceed Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer puter d Be sure to choose the Local printer attached to this computer option Click Next to proceed e On the Select a Printer Port screen be sure to choose the Create a new port Create a new port r Type of port Adobe PDF Port option Adobe POF Pat NETGEAR FR Print Server From the Type of port drop down list Nese Ti See be sure to select Standard TCP IP Port Select a Printer Port screen Click Next to proceed This will start the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard 7 2 Print Server 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Complete the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard a Click Next to proceed with the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard The Add Port screen will display b From the Add Port screen enter 192 168 0 1 the FWG114P v2 default LAN IP address in the IP Address field Note If you changed the default LAN IP Address of the FWG114P v2 be sure to use the address you assigned here The
225. king 8 19 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Scenario 1 FWG114P v2 to FWG114P v2 with Preshared Secrets Note This scenario assumes all ports are open on the FWG114P v2 You can verify this by reviewing the security settings as seen in the Rules menu on page 6 5 Scenario 1 Gateway A Gateway B RIES _ 22 23 24 25 WAN IP 10 5 6 1 24 INTERNET d 172 23 9 1 24 LAN IP LAN IP 1 Figure 8 11 LAN to LAN VPN access from an FWG114P v2 to an FWG114P v2 Use this scenario illustration and configuration screens as a model to build your configuration 1 Log in to the FWG114P v2 labeled Gateway A as in the illustration Log in at the default address of ttp 192 168 0 1 with the default user name of admin and default password of password or using whatever password and LAN address you have chosen 2 Configure the WAN Internet and LAN IP addresses of the FWG114P v2 a From the main menu Setup section click on the Basic Setup link Internet IP Address WAN IP Get Dynamically From ISP add resses Use Static IP Address IP Address 14 as Jis e ISP provides IP Subnet Mask ass ass 2ss o ihese addresses Gateway IP Address ko e Ja 13 Figure 8 12 FWG114P v2 Internet IP Address menu b Configure the WAN Internet Address according to the settings above and click Apply to save your settings For more information on configuring
226. l Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e WPA WPA2 with Radius or WPA WPA2 PSK Wi Fi Protected Access WPA and WPA2 data encryption provides data security The very strong authentication along with dynamic per frame rekeying of WPA and WPA2 make it virtually impossible to compromise Because this is anew standard wireless device driver and software availability may be limited Understanding Wireless Settings To configure the wireless settings of your FWG114P v2 click the Wireless link in the Setup section of the main menu The wireless settings menu will appear as shown below Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name SSID NETGEAR Region Select Region gt Channel 10 2 457GHz Current Channel No 10 2 457GHz Mode gandb gt Wireless Access Point M Enable Wireless Access Point M Allow Broadcast of Name SSID Wireless Station Access List Setup Access List Wireless Security l None 7 Apply Cancel Figure 4 2 Wireless Settings menu Note The 802 11b and 802 11g wireless networking protocols are configured in exactly the same fashion The FWG114P v2 will automatically adjust to the 802 11g or 802 11b protocol as the device requires without compromising the speed of the other devices gt Wireless Configuration 4 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Wireless Network The station name of the FWG
227. l determine which printer software to use Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation Identify the printer connected to FWG114P Sa dki deon I pa printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for v2 USB printer port a From the Install Printer Software screen ae Priis a A r 7 Compaq SF Epson Stylus COLOR 800 ESC P 2 selection lists find the manufacturer and grotes 5 Epson Stylus COLOR 850 ESC P 2 model of the printer you connected to the z z USB port on the FWG1 14P v2 cg am driver is digitally signed Windows Have Disk Tell me why driver signing is important Click Next to proceed lt Back Next gt Cancel If the printer software is already installed on this computer the Add Printer Add Printer Wizard Install Printer Software page Wizard will inform you and let you keep f If you do not see your make and model the existing driver printer in the lists and you are connected b The Name Your Printer screen prompts to the Internet you can click the for a descriptive name and if you wantit Windows Update button to download to be the default Enter your choices additional printer software from the Microsoft Web site or you can click the Click Next to proceed y Have Disk button to install the printer c On the Printer Sharing screen accept the software from a disk you have Do not share this printer option and click Next
228. l print server to the other Inbound rules WAN to LAN restrict access by outsiders to private resources selectively allowing only specific outside users to access specific resources Outbound rules LAN to WAN determine what outside resources local users can have access to A firewall has two default rules one for inbound traffic and one for outbound The default rules of the FWG114P v2 are e Inbound Block all access from outside except responses to requests from the LAN side e Outbound Allow all access from the LAN side to the outside 6 4 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 These default rules are shown in the Rules table of the Rules menu in Figure 6 2 Rules Outbound Services Enable Service Name Action LAN Users WAN Servers Log O 1 netmeeting ALLOW always Any Any Never Default Yes Any ALLOW always Any Any Never Inbound Services Enable Service Name Action LAN Server IP address WAN Users Log O 1 IPSec ALLOW always 192 168 0 100 Any Never Default Yes Any BLOCK always Any Never Add Edit Move Delete Options C Enable VPN Passthrough IPSec PPTP L2TP Drop fragmented IP packets E Block TCP flood M Block UDP flood v Block non standard packets Figure 6 2 Rules menu You can define additional rules that will specify exceptions to the de
229. ld blank the firewall will attempt to learn the domain automatically from the ISP If this is not successful you may need to enter it manually 2 Enter the PPPoE login user name and password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive If you wish to change the idle timeout enter a new value in minutes Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 3 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Note You will no longer need to launch the ISP s login program on your computer in order to access the Internet When you start an Internet application your firewall will automatically log you in 3 The Idle Timeout setting determines how long to wait after there is no activity before disconnecting from the Internet This is useful in countries where Internet service charges are based on the amount of time connected to the Internet Whenever a computer on the network requests access to the Internet the FWG114P v2 will automatically reconnect 4 Domain Name Server DNS Address If you know that your ISP does not automatically transmit DNS addresses to the firewall during login select Use these DNS servers and enter the IP address of your ISP s Primary DNS Server If a Secondary DNS Server address is available enter it also Note If you enter an address here after you finish configuring the firewall reboot your PCs so that the settings take effect
230. le with each other even if they are from different manufacturers A user with a Wi Fi product can use any brand of access point with any other brand of client hardware that is built to the Wi Fi standard Wi Fi Alliance formerly WECA Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance The Wi Fi Alliance is a nonprofit international association formed in 1999 to certify interoperability of wireless Local Area Network products based on IEEE 802 11 specification Currently the Wi Fi Alliance has 193 member companies from around the world and 509 products have received Wi Fi certification since certification began in March of 2000 The goal of the Wi Fi Alliance s members is to enhance the user experience through product interoperability www weca net Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA is a security technology for wireless networks that improves on the authentication and encryption features of WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy In fact WPA was developed by the networking industry in response to the shortcomings of WEP One of the key technologies behind WPA is the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP TKIP addresses the encryption weaknesses of WEP Another key component of WPA is built in authentication that WEP does not offer With this feature WPA provides roughly comparable security to VPN tunneling with WEP 12 Glossary 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 with the
231. ll Print Server Model FWG114P v2 If an IP address appears under Installed Gateways write down the address This is the ISP s gateway address Select the address and then click Remove to remove the gateway address Select the DNS Configuration tab If any DNS server addresses are shown write down the addresses If any information appears in the Host or Domain information box write it down Click Disable DNS Click OK to save your changes and close the TCP IP Properties dialog box You are returned to the Network window Click OK Reboot your PC at the prompt You may also be prompted to insert your Windows CD Obtaining ISP Configuration Information for Macintosh Computers As mentioned above you may need to collect configuration information from your Macintosh so that you can use this information when you configure the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server Following this procedure is only necessary when your ISP does not dynamically supply the account information To get the information you need to configure the firewall for Internet access 1 From the Apple menu select Control Panels then TCP IP The TCP IP Control Panel opens which displays a list of configuration settings If the Configure setting is Using DHCP Server your account uses a dynamically assigned IP address In this case close the Control Panel and skip the rest of this section 2 Ifan IP address and subnet mask are shown write do
232. ls that provides data authentication integrity and confidentiality as data is transferred between communication points across IP networks IPSec provides data security at the IP packet level A packet is a data bundle that is organized for transmission across a network and includes a header and payload the data in the packet IPSec emerged as a viable network security standard because enterprises wanted to ensure that data could be securely transmitted over the Internet IPSec protects against possible security exposures by protecting data while in transit IPSec Security Features IPSec is the most secure method commercially available for connecting network sites PSec was designed to provide the following security features when transferring packets across networks e Authentication Verifies that the packet received is actually from the claimed sender e Integrity Ensures that the contents of the packet did not change in transit e Confidentiality Conceals the message content through encryption IPSec Components IPSec contains the following elements F 2 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Encapsulating Security Payload ESP Provides confidentiality authentication and integrity e Authentication Header AH Provides authentication and integrity e Internet Key Exchange IKE Provides key management and Security
233. m tray icon 2 Select Connect to open the My Connections list 3 Choose FWG114P v2 The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server will report the results of the attempt to connect Once the connection is established you can access resources of the network connected to the FWGI114P v2 Another method is to ping from the remote PC to the LAN IP address of the FWG114P v2 To perform a ping test using our example start from the remote PC 1 Establish an Internet connection from the PC 2 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and then click Run 3 Type ping t 192 168 0 1 and click OK This will cause a continuous ping to be sent to the first FWG114P v2 After a period of up to two minutes the ping response should change from timed out to reply Virtual Private Networking 8 45 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 To test the connection to a computer connected to the FWG114P v2 simply ping the IP address of that computer Once connected you can open a browser on the remote PC and enter the LAN IP Address of the FWGI114P v2 which is http 192 168 0 1 in this example After a short wait you should see the login screen of the FWG114P v2 From the FWG114P v2 to the Client PC You can use the FWG114P v2 Diagnostic utilities to test the VPN connection from the FWG114P v2 to the client PC Run ping tests from the Diagnosti
234. modem or if you configured it using instructions provided by your ISP you need to copy the configuration information from your PC s Network TCP IP Properties window or Macintosh TCP IP Control Panel before reconfiguring your PC for use with the firewall These procedures are described next Obtaining ISP Configuration Information for Windows Computers As mentioned above you may need to collect configuration information from your PC so that you can use this information when you configure the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server Following this procedure is only necessary when your ISP does not dynamically supply the account information To get the information you need to configure the firewall for Internet access 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button point to Settings and then click Control Panel 2 Double click the Network icon The Network window opens which displays a list of installed components 3 Select TCP IP and then click Properties The TCP IP Properties dialog box opens 4 Select the IP Address tab If an IP address and subnet mask are shown write down the information If an address is present your account uses a fixed static IP address If no address is present your account uses a dynamically assigned IP address Click Obtain an IP address automatically 5 Select the Gateway tab C 10 Preparing Your Network 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewa
235. mputer bus used internally on most computers Other bus types include ISA and AGP PCIs and other computer buses enable the addition of internal cards that provide services and features not supported by the motherboard or other connectors Peer to peer network also called Ad Hoc in WLANs A wireless or wired computer network that has no server or central hub or router All the networked PCs are equally able to act as a network server or client and each client computer can talk to all the other wireless computers without having to go through an access point or hub However since there is no central base station to monitor traffic or provide Internet access the various signals can collide with each other reducing overall performance PHY The lowest layer within the OSI Network Model It deals primarily with transmission of the raw bit stream over the PHYsical transport medium In the case of wireless LANs the transport medium is free space The 8 Glossary 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 PHY defines parameters such as data rates modulation method signaling parameters transmitter receiver synchronization etc Within an actual radio implementation the PHY corresponds to the radio front end and baseband signal processing sections Plug and Play A computer system feature that provides for automatic configuration of add ons and peripheral devices such as
236. n a configuration file This file can be saved backed up to a user s computer retrieved restored from the user s computer or cleared to the factory default settings Maintenance 9 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 From the Main Menu of the browser interface under the Maintenance heading select the Settings Backup heading to bring up the menu shown below Settings Backup Save a copy of current settings Back Up Restore saved settings from file Restore Revert to factory default settings Browse Erase Figure 9 5 Settings Backup menu Three options are available and are described in the following sections Restoring and Backing Up the Configuration The Restore and Backup options in the Settings Backup menu allow you to save and retrieve a file containing your router s configuration settings To save your settings click Backup Your browser will extract the configuration file from the router and will prompt you for a location on your computer to store the file You can give the file a meaningful name at this time such as SBC cfg To restore your settings from a saved configuration file enter the full path to the file on your computer or click the Browse button to locate the file When you have located it click the Restore button to send the file to the router The router will then reboot automatically 9 8 Maint
237. n correctly wireless clients must also support WMM A Powerful True Firewall with Content Filtering Unlike simple Internet sharing NAT routers the FWG114P v2 is a true firewall using stateful packet inspection to defend against hacker attacks Its firewall features include e DoS protection Automatically detects and thwarts DoS attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND Attack and IP Spoofing e Blocks unwanted traffic from the Internet to your LAN e Blocks access from your LAN to Internet locations or services that you specify as off limits Introduction 2 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Logs security incidents The FWG114P v2 will log security events such as blocked incoming traffic port scans attacks and administrator logins You can configure the router to e mail the log to you at specified intervals You can also configure the router to send immediate alert messages to your e mail address or e mail pager whenever a significant event occurs e With its content filtering feature the FWG114P v2 prevents objectionable content from reaching your PCs The router allows you to control access to Internet content by screening for keywords within Web addresses You can configure the router to log and report attempts to access objectionable Internet sites Security The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server is equipped with s
238. n process you need to manually install and configure TCP IP on each networked PC Before starting locate your Windows CD you may need to insert it during the TCP IP installation process Installing or Verifying Windows Networking Components To install or verify the necessary components for IP networking 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button point to Settings and then click Control Panel 2 Double click the Network and Dialup Connections icon 3 Ifan Ethernet adapter is present in your PC you should see an entry for Local Area Connection Double click that entry 4 Select Properties Preparing Your Network C 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 5 Verify that Client for Microsoft Networks and Internet Protocol TCP IP are present If not select Install and add them 6 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP click Properties and verify that Obtain an IP address automatically is selected 7 Click OK and close all Network and Dialup Connections windows 8 Make sure your PC is connected to the firewall then reboot your PC Verifying TCP IP Properties To check your PC s TCP IP configuration 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and then click Run The Run window opens 2 Type cma and then click OK A command window opens 3 Type ipconfig all Your IP Configuration information will be l
239. narios were developed by the VPN Consortium hitp www vpnc org The goal is to make it easier to get the systems from different vendors to interoperate NETGEAR is providing you with both of these scenarios in the following two formats e VPN Consortium Scenarios without Any Product Implementation Details as presented in VPNC Scenario 1 Gateway to Gateway with Preshared Secrets on page 8 19 and VPNC Scenario 2 Gateway to Gateway with Certificates on page 8 25 e VPN Consortium Scenarios Based on the FWG114P v2 User Interface as presented in Scenario 1 FWG114P v2 to FWG114P v2 with Preshared Secrets on page 8 20 and Scenario 2 FWG114P v2 to FWG114P v2 with Certificates on page 8 26 The purpose of providing these two versions of the same scenarios is to help you determine where the two vendors use different vocabulary Seeing the examples presented in these different ways will reveal how systems from different vendors do the same thing How to Use the VPN Wizard to Configure a VPN Tunnel Note If you have turned NAT off before configuring VPN IPSec tunnels you must first open UDP port 500 for inbound traffic as explained in Example Port Forwarding for VPN Tunnels when NAT is Off on page 6 8 gt Follow this procedure to configure a VPN tunnel using the VPN Wizard Note The LAN IP address ranges of each VPN endpoint must be different The connection will fail if both are using the NETGEAR
240. nction of translating an Internet name such as WWw netgear com to a numeric IP address For a fixed IP address configuration you must obtain DNS server addresses from your ISP and enter them manually here You should reboot your PCs after configuring the firewall for these settings to take effect 3 Click Apply to save the settings 4 Click Test to test your Internet connection If the NETGEAR Web site does not appear within one minute refer to Chapter 11 Troubleshooting How to Configure the Serial Port as the Primary Internet Connection Use the procedure below to configure an Internet connection via the serial port of your firewall There are three steps to configuring the serial port of your firewall for an Internet connection 1 Connect the firewall to your ISDN or dial up analog modem 2 Configure the firewall 3 Connect to the Internet Follow the steps below to configure a serial port Internet connection on your firewall 1 Connect the Firewall to your ISDN or dial up modem a Turn off your modem and connect the cable from the serial port of the FWG114P v2 to the modem b Turn on the modem and wait about 30 seconds for the lights to stop blinking 2 Configure the Serial Port of the Firewall a Use a browser to log in to the firewall at http 192 168 0 1 with its default User Name of admin and default Password of password or using whatever Password you have set up b From the Setup Basic Settings menu cl
241. net Mask of Gateway A 255 255 255 0 in our example in the Remote IP Subnet Mask field From the AH Configuration Authentication Algorithm drop down box select MD5 Select the Enable Encryption check box From the ESP Configuration Encryption Algorithm drop down box select 3DES Select the Enable Authentication check box From the ESP Configuration Authentication Algorithm drop down box select MDS Select the NETBIOS Enable check box 5 Click the Apply Button You will be taken back to the VPN Policies Menu page NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPN Policies Policy Table Enable Name Type Local Remote AH JESP 1 W 0318 Auto 172 23 9 11255 255 255 0 10 5 6 1 255 255 255 0 Disabled ESP Move Delete Apply Cancel Add Auto Policy Add Manual Policy Figure H 11 NETGEAR FVS328 VPN Policies Menu Post Configuration 6 When the screen returns to the VPN Policies make sure the Enable check box is selected Click the Apply button Test the VPN Connection 1 From a PC behind the NETGEAR FVS318 or FVM318 Gateway A attempt to ping the remote FWG114P v2 Gateway B LAN Interface address example address 172 23 9 1 2 From the FVS318 or FVM318 click the Router Status link on the left side of the Settings management menu Click the Show VPN Status button Thi
242. network that includes an access point the ESSID is used but may still be referred to as SSID An SSID is a thirty two character maximum alphanumeric key identifying the name of the wireless local area network Some vendors refer to the SSID as network name For the wireless devices in a network to communicate with each other all devices must be configured with the same SSID The ESSID is usually broadcast in the air from an access point The wireless station sometimes can be configured with the ESSID ANY This means the wireless station will try to associate with whichever access point has the stronger radio frequency RF signal providing that both the access point and wireless station use Open System authentication Authentication and WEP Data Encryption The absence of a physical connection between nodes makes the wireless links vulnerable to eavesdropping and information theft To provide a certain level of security the IEEE 802 11 standard has defined these two types of authentication methods e Open System With Open System authentication a wireless computer can join any network and receive any messages that are not encrypted E 2 Wireless Networking Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Shared Key With Shared Key authentication only those PCs that possess the correct authentication key can join the network By default IEEE 802 11 w
243. nfigured and applied to the FWG114P v2 How to Configure Auto Rollover Follow the steps below to configure a serial port auto rollover connection 1 Configure a serial port modem according to the instructions above 2 From the main menu click Auto rollover in the Serial Port section Serial Port Configuration 5 3 201 10301 02 May 2005M 10207 01 Reference Manual v2 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Auto Rollover Serial Port Internet Access Enable Auto Rollover Use serial port if Broadband connection fails Broadband failure detection Ping ISP DNS O Ping publici o o o Jo Auto Rollover waittime 1 min Dial up Internet Account AccountUser Name guest Password Telephone e Alternative Telephone SS Connect as required CI Disconnect after Idle Time of 5 min Internet IP Address Get Dynamically From ISP Use Static IP Address lo jo jjo dlo DNS IP Address aon Get Automatically From ISP Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS Sa j Secondary DNS l 1 uy Figure 5 2 Auto Rollover configuration menu 3 Configure the Auto Rollover settings 4 Click Apply for the changes to take effect Configuring Dial in on the Serial Port Dial in lets a single remote computer connect to the FWG114P v2 through the serial port to gain access to LAN resources or a remote access server Be sure you have prepared the basic requirement
244. nfigured in the Ports menu Instead of discarding this traffic you can have it forwarded to one computer on your network This computer is called the Default DMZ Server The WAN Setup menu lets you configure a Default DMZ Server To assign a computer or server to be a Default DMZ server follow these steps 1 Click WAN Setup link on the Advanced section of the main menu 2 Type the IP address for that server To remove the default DMZ server replace the IP address numbers with all zeros 3 Click Apply e Respond to Ping on Internet WAN Port If you want the router to respond to a ping from the Internet click the Respond to Ping on Internet WAN Port check box This should only be used as a diagnostic tool since it allows your router to be discovered Do not check this box unless you have a specific reason to do so 10 2 Advanced Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Setting the MTU Size The default MTU size is usually fine The normal MTU Maximum Transmit Unit value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes For some ISPs particularly those using PPPoE you may need to reduce the MTU This should not be done unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP Any packets sent through the router that are larger than the configured MTU size will be repackaged into smaller packets to meet the MTU requirement To change the MTU
245. nnection of the first FWG114P v2 fails The procedures for these configuration options are presented below Serial Port Configuration 5 1 201 10301 02 May 2005M 10207 01 Reference Manual v2 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Configuring a Serial Port Modem You can configure a serial port modem for any of the features described above Be sure you have prepared the basic requirements listed below then follow the how to procedure Basic Requirements for Serial Port Modem Configuration Configuring a serial port modem requires these elements 1 A serial analog or ISDN modem 2 A serial modem cable with a DB9 connector 3 An active phone or ISDN line How to Configure a Serial Port Modem Follow the steps below to configure a serial port modem 1 From the main menu click Modem in the Serial Port section Serial Port Modem Serial Line Speed 115200 bps Modem Type Standard Modem Mi Modem Properties Figure 5 1 Serial Port Modem configuration menu 2 Select the Serial Line Speed This is the maximum speed the modem will attempt to use For ISDN permanent connections the speeds are typically 64000 or 128000 bps For dial up modems 56000 bps would be a typical setting 3 Select the Modem Type For ISDN select Permanent connection leased line 5 2 Serial Port Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005M 10207 01
246. nodes in the same network must be configured with the same SSID e Authentication Circle one Open System or Shared Key Choose Shared Key for more security Note If you select shared key the other devices in the network will not connect unless they are set to Shared Key as well and have the same keys in the same positions as those in the FWGI114P v2 e WEP Encryption Keys For all four 802 11b keys choose the Key Size Circle one 64 or 128 bits Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 e WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Pre Shared Key Record the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK key Key e WPA or WPA2 RADIUS Settings For WPA or WPA2 record the following RADIUS settings Server Name IP Address Primary Secondary Port Shared Key Use the procedures described in the following sections to configure the FWG114P v2 Store this information in a safe place Wireless Configuration 4 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 How to Set Up and Test Basic Wireless Connectivity Follow the instructions below to set up and test basic wireless connectivity Once you have established basic wireless connectivity you can enable security settings appropriate to your needs 1 Log in using the default LAN address of http 192 168 0 with the default user name of admin and default password of password or using whatever LAN address and password you have set up Wireless Settings Wireless Netw
247. ns discard the request Related Documents The station with the correct IP address responds with its own MAC address directly to the sending device The receiving station provides the transmitting station with the required destination MAC address The IP address data and MAC address data for each station are held in an ARP table The next time data is sent the address can be obtained from the address information in the table For more information about address assignment refer to the IETF documents RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space For more information about IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT Domain Name Server Many of the resources on the Internet can be addressed by simple descriptive names such as www NETGEAR com This addressing is very helpful at the application level but the descriptive name must be translated to an IP address in order for a user to actually contact the resource Just as a telephone directory maps names to phone numbers or as an ARP table maps IP addresses to MAC addresses a domain name system DNS server maps descriptive names of network resources to IP addresses Networks Routing and Firewall Basics B 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 When a PC accesses a resource by its descriptive name it firs
248. nual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 b Click Pre Shared Key Pre Shared Key Enter Pre Shared Key at least 8 characters r In this example enter this This key is used during Authentication Phase if the Authentication Method Proposal is Pre Shared key pre shar ed key in this field j hr5xb84l6aa9r6 OK Cancel Figure 8 29 Connection Identity Pre Shared Key c Enter hr5xb84l6aa9r6 which is the same Pre Shared Key entered in the FWG114P v2 d Click OK 4 Configure the Connection Identity Settings a In the Network Security Policy list click the Security Policy subheading NEIWOTIK Security roncy My Connections Security Policy FWG114P 2 Select Phase 1 Negotiation Mode 3 My Identity C Main Mod SE eae Qs Other Connections Aggressive Mode C Use Manual Keys IV Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS PFS Key Group Diffie Hellman Group2 v IV Enable Replay Detection Figure 8 30 Security Policy b For this example ensure that the following settings are configured Inthe Select Phase 1 Negotiation Mode menu select Aggressive Mode Select the Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS check box Inthe PFS Key Group drop down list Diffie Hellman Group 2 Select the Enable Replay Detection check box Virtual Private Networking 8 41 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model
249. nuasscenanane 11 5 Testing the Path from Your Computer to a Remote Device cece eee 11 6 Restoring the Default Configuration and Password ccsccscesseceseesteccsseecsseeceeesee 11 7 Problems win Cele and TIME accrusiorionrananaana n a NRE Appendix A Technical Specifications Appendix B Networks Routing and Firewall Basics Rolad FUNERO en sovanamnnceqaciuts coveecinenvenemateseianmsaeiencumesiaas B 1 Bane PUNE ONCOS aini O D a aa a A E A E A A A E E T A OES T B 1 Roung khiormaion Protocol s ccictisd cccatdelcaciceetdnleceamnieitinnlidi Me demneaiaan Boe IP Addresses and the Internat 4 asassinivacessnieis exes seen ianeivuiiidisesseinadoaiemnidpeettanlanninned B 2 eC Sewn ee tee reer nes etree a Sree ene mrt eenr etree ee B 4 Contents ix 201 10301 02 May 2005 Subnet Addressing a B 4 Private IP Addres j iene Givin ore Single IP Address Operation Using NAT ccccccssceecessseeeeeeesssteeeeessstteeeesssstees BOT MAC Addresses and Address Resolution Protocol ccccsseccsseceeeesesseesteeesteee BOO eee Bee a Ta cold ts seep preer eee reer rece eet tert crete renee neret mre mee rete tontre tnt terertrrn tre IP s Caniguistint byt DHCP EA IIE D EE AAE E E E A oi T A E N E Eee imemet sete he AMO FISAS ccestceteretea hs ccedeneeepeacisteedp a a haan BA Stateful pachat pions PPEP PEE E E rei Denial ot Sawios PUIG in tested dadeatashesedecanemndivonaeeiantamedcke tamemcienniaeEee I l Ethernet Cabling
250. ny wireless devices Access points can also bridge to each other There are various types of access points also referred to as base stations used in both wireless and wired networks These include bridges hubs switches routers and gateways The differences between them are not always precise because certain capabilities associated with one can also be added to another For example a router can do bridging and a hub may also be a switch But they are all involved in making sure data is transferred from one location to another 2 Glossary 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 A bridge connects devices that all use the same kind of protocol A router can connect networks that use differing protocols It also reads the addresses included in the packets and routes them to the appropriate computer station working with any other routers in the network to choose the best path to send the packets on A wireless hub or access point adds a few capabilities such as roaming and provides a network connection to a variety of clients but it does not allocate bandwidth A switch is a hub that has extra intelligence It can read the address of a packet and send it to the appropriate computer station A wireless gateway is an access point that provides additional capabilities such as NAT routing DHCP firewalls security etc Ad Hoc mode A client setting that provides indepen
251. o 10 2 457GHz Mode gandb gt Wireless Access Point M Enable Wireless Access Point M Allow Broadcast of Name SSID Wireless Station Access List Setup Access List Wireless Security WPA and WPA2 with Radius x Encryption TKIP AES gt Radius Server Settings Primary Server Name IP Address Secondary Server Name lP Address Radius Port Shared Key Radius Accounting I Enable RADIUS Accounting Radius Accounting Port E Update Report every l Minutes Apply Cancel Figure 4 8 Wireless Settings menu WPA and WPA2 with Radius 3 Select WPA and WPA2 with Radius on the pulldown menu The WPA and WPA2 with Radius menu will open Encryption There is no choice for encryption this is displayed for your information For WPA and WPA2 with Radius WPA clients must use TKIP and WPA2 clients must use AES 4 Enter the Radius settings e Primary Server Name IP Address This field is required Enter the name or IP address of the primary Radius Server on your LAN Wireless Configuration 4 17 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Secondary Radius Server Name IP Address This field is optional If you have a Secondary Radius Server on your LAN enter its name or IP address here e Radius Port Enter the port number used for connecting to the Radius Server e Shared Key Enter the desired value for the Shared Key This must match the value us
252. ogies advance or systems requirements are altered The seven layers are e Physical e Data Link e Network e Transport e Session e Presentation e Application The IEFE 802 11 Standard encompasses the physical layer PHY and the lower portion of the data link layer The lower portion of the data link layer is often referred to as the Medium Access Controller MAC sublayer MAC Media Access Control Every wireless 802 11 device has its own specific MAC address hard coded into it This unique identifier can be used to provide security for wireless networks When a network uses a MAC table only the 802 11 radios that have had their MAC addresses added to that network s MAC table will be able to get onto the network Mesh Networks Also called mesh topology mesh is a network topology in which devices are connected with many redundant interconnections between network nodes In a full mesh topology every node has a connection to every other node in the network Mesh networks may be wired or wireless Mesh network Glossary 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 In a wireless mesh example each of the spheres below represent a mesh router Corporate servers and printers may be shared by attaching to each mesh router For wireless access to the mesh an access point must be attached to any one of the mesh routers Multiple Input Multiple Output MIMO
253. old IP header with the source and destination IP addresses unchanged and the processed packet payload Transport mode does not shield the information in the IP header therefore an attacker can learn where the packet is coming from and where it is going to The previous packet diagrams show a packet in transport mode e Tunnel Mode The tunnel mode IPSec implementation encapsulates the entire IP packet The entire packet becomes the payload of the packet that is processed with IPSec A new IP header is created that contains the two IPSec gateway addresses The gateways perform the encapsulation decapsulation on behalf of the hosts Tunnel mode ESP prevents an attacker from analyzing the data and deciphering it as well as knowing who the packet is from and where it is going Note AH and ESP can be used in both transport mode or tunnel mode Original Packet IP HDR TCP Data Si W A Now ESP Original ESP ESP IPHDR HDR iPHDR TCP Data Trailer Authentication Encrypted Authenticated Packet with IPSec Authentication Header in Tunnel Mode Figure F 3 Original packet and packet with IPSec ESP in Tunnel mode Virtual Private Networking F 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Key Management IPSec uses the Internet Key Exchange IKE protocol to facilitate and automate the SA setup and the exchange of keys between parties transferr
254. on An already defined IKE policy is required for VPN Auto Policy configuration From the VPN Policies section of the main menu you can navigate to the VPN Auto Policy configuration menu VPN Policies Policy Table Enable Name Type Local Remo VPN Auto Policy General Policy Name IKE policy FYS318 v Remote VPN Endpoint address Type IP Address Address Data SA Life Time 300 0 iKybtes O IPSec PFS PFS Key Group Group 1 768 Bi Seconds Traffic Selector Local IP Select i Start IP address Finish IP address Subnet Mask Remote IP Select v Start IP address Finish IP address Subnet Mask AH Configuration CI Enable Authentication Authentication Algorithm ESP Configuration C Enable Encryption Encryption Algorithm DES CI Enable Authentication Authentication Algorithm MD5 C NETBIOS Enable Figure 8 3 VPN Auto Policy Menu 8 6 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 The VPN Auto Policy fields are defined in the following table Table 8 1 VPN Auto Policy Configuration Fields Field Description General These settings identify this policy and determine its major characte
255. on Status action buttons Field Description Renew Click the Renew button to renew the DHCP lease Click Show Statistics to display router usage statistics System Up Time 30 14 42 Port Status TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Tx Bis Rx B s Up Time WAN 21736 136179 Oo 0 0 30 14 42 LAN 1OMM00M 15635 55840 Oo 1171 642 30 14 42 WLAN 11M 54M 10263 0 0 0 0 30 14 42 Serial Not Connected 0 0 nia 0 0 0 0 0 Poll Interval s j Set Interval Stop secs Figure 9 3 Router Statistics screen This screen shows the following statistics Table 9 1 Router Statistics Fields Field Description interface The statistics for the WAN Internet LAN local Wireless and Serial interfaces For each interface the screen displays Status The link status of the interface TxPkts The number of packets transmitted on this interface since reset or manual clear RxPkts The number of packets received on this interface since reset or manual clear Collisions The number of collisions on this interface since reset or manual clear Tx B s The current transmission outbound bandwidth used on the interfaces Rx B s The current reception inbound bandwidth used on the interfaces Up Time The amount of time since the router was last restarted Maintenance 9 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table 9 1 Router Statistics Fields continued
256. onds to the station s default key The access point compares the decrypted text with the original challenge text If the decrypted text matches the original challenge text then the access point and the station share the same WEP Key and the access point authenticates the station 5 The station connects to the network If the decrypted text does not match the original challenge text the access point and station do not share the same WEP Key then the access point will refuse to authenticate the station and the station will be unable to communicate with either the 802 11 network or Ethernet network This process is illustrated below E 4 Wireless Networking Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Shared Key Authentication Steps 1 Authentication gt request sent to AP Access Point lt 2 AP sends challenge text iimm INTERNET 5 Cable or DLS modem Client l 3 Client encrypts attempting challenge text and gt FiFi to connect sends it back to AP 4 AP decrypts and if correct lt e _ i authenticates client 5 Client connects to network gt Figure E 2 Shared key authentication Overview of WEP Parameters Before enabling WEP on an 802 11 network you must first consider what type of encryption you require and the key size you want to use Ty
257. ons will see as the holder owner of this certificate This should be your registered business name or official company name Generally all certificates should have the same value in the Subject field Hash Algorithm Select the desired option MD5 or SHA1 Signature Algorithm Select the desired option DSS or RSA Signature Key Length Select the desired option 512 1024 or 2048 e Optional IP Address If you use IP type in the IKE policy you should input the IP Address here Otherwise you should leave this blank Domain Name If you have a domain name you can enter it here Otherwise you should leave this blank Virtual Private Networking 8 27 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 E mail Address You can enter your e mail address here d Click the Next button to continue The FWG114P v2 generates a Self Certificate Request as shown below Self Certificate Request Certificate Details Subject Name Highlight copy and Hash Algorithm paste this data into Signature Algorithm a text file Key Length Data to supply to CA BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST MIIBT CBuAIBA APNOOWCWYDVQQDEWROZXNOMIGEMAOGCSqGSIb3SDQEBAQUAA4GN ADCBiQKBgQCScISOMONZyJ 2Hpvj S3JEmBotxbk I cOY CPTDop7ud b6EYbOd0o04y bt 6pCCh2TmZCklp8yE941B25wjcgRsntJotzP2MhEL1I tehxT11U09sUUtMhwp7TL T3Q60 lIr37extkgdtMwl 7 rhxoOwtOlLJYUACvIgZ872HSp4ZT0er
258. oolbar click on the Start button and select Run 2 Inthe field provided type Ping followed by the IP address of the router as in this example ping 192 168 0 1 3 Click on OK You should see a message like this one Pinging lt IP address gt with 32 bytes of data If the path is working you see this message Troubleshooting 11 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Reply from lt IP address gt bytes 32 time NN ms TTL xxx If the path is not working you see this message Request timed out If the path is not functioning correctly you could have one of the following problems Wrong physical connections Make sure the LAN port LED is on If the LED is off follow the instructions in LAN or Internet Port LEDs Not On on page 11 2 Check that the corresponding Link LEDs are on for your network interface card and for the hub ports if any that are connected to your workstation and router Wrong network configuration Verify that the Ethernet card driver software and TCP IP software are both installed and configured on your computer or workstation Verify that the IP address for your router and your workstation are correct and that the addresses are on the same subnet Testing the Path from Your Computer to a Remote Device After verifying that the LAN path works correctly test the path from your computer to a remote
259. or ActiveX enabled If you are using Internet Explorer click Refresh to be sure the Java applet is loaded e Try quitting the browser and launching it again e Make sure you are using the correct login information The factory default login name is admin and the password is password Make sure that CAPS LOCK is off when entering this information If the router does not save changes you have made in the Web Configuration Interface check the following e When entering configuration settings be sure to click the APPLY button before moving to another menu or tab or your changes will be lost e Click the Refresh or Reload button in the Web browser The changes may have occurred but the Web browser may be caching the old configuration Troubleshooting 11 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Troubleshooting the ISP Connection If your router is unable to access the Internet you should first determine whether the router is able to obtain a WAN IP address from the ISP Unless you have been assigned a static IP address your router must request an IP address from the ISP You can determine whether the request was successful using the Web Configuration Manager To check the WAN IP address 1 Launch your browser and select an external site such as www netgear com 2 Access the Main Menu of the router s configuration at http 192 168 0 1 3 Under
260. or Certificate upload Delete Upload Certificate Generate Request Figure 8 19 Self Certificate Requests table 5 Receive the certificate back from the Trusted Root CA and save it as a text file Note In the case of a Windows 2000 internal CA the CA administrator might simply e mail it to back to you Follow the procedures of your CA Save the certificate you get back from the CA as a text file called final txt 6 Upload the new certificate a From the main menu VPN section click on the Certificates link b Click the radio button of the Self Certificate Request you want to upload c Click the Upload Certificate button d Browse to the location of the file you saved in step 5 above which contains the certificate from the CA e Click the Upload button Virtual Private Networking 8 29 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 f You will now see the FWG114P v2 entry in the Active Self Certificates table and the pending FWG114P v2 Self Certificate Request is gone as illustrated below Certificates Active Self Certificates Name Subject Name Issuer Name Expiry Time 1 Netgear FQDN netgear com O VPNC OU Conformance testing root 1 Mar 26 22 53 29 2011 GMT 2 2 FWG1 CNetest iC FIVO SSH Communications SecurityOU WWeh testCN Test CA1 Dec 1 00 00 00 2003 GMT Self Certificate Requests Name Status Upload Ce
261. ork Name SSID NETGEAR Region Select Region Channel 11 2 462GHz Current Channel No channel_no Made gandb Figure 4 3 Wireless Settings menu 2 Set the Regulatory Domain correctly 3 Choose a suitable descriptive name for the wireless network name SSID In the SSID box enter a value of up to 32 alphanumeric characters The default SSID is NETGEAR Note The characters are case sensitive An access point always functions in infrastructure mode The SSID for any wireless device communicating with the access point must match the SSID configured in the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 If they do not match you will not get a wireless connection to the FWG114P v2 4 Set the Channel It should not be necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby wireless router or access point Select a channel that is not being used by any other wireless networks within several hundred feet of your wireless firewall print server For more information on the wireless channel frequencies please refer to Wireless Channels on page E 7 5 Depending on the types of wireless adapters you have in your computers choose from the Mode drop down list 6 For initial configuration and test leave the Wireless Card Access List set to All Wireless Stations and the Encryption Strength set to Disable 4 8 Wireless Configuration 201 1
262. osen from the range 1024 to 65535 by the authors of the application Although the FWG114P v2 already holds a list of many service port numbers you are not limited to these choices Use the Services menu to add additional services and applications to the list for use in defining firewall rules The Services menu shows a list of services that you have defined To define a new service first you must determine which port number or range of numbers is used by the application This information can usually be determined by contacting the publisher of the application or from user groups of newsgroups When you have the port number information go the Services menu and click on the Add Custom Service button The Add Services menu will appear To add a service 1 Enter a descriptive name for the service so that you will remember what it is 2 Select whether the service uses TCP or UDP as its transport protocol If you can t determine which is used select both 3 Enter the lowest port number used by the service 4 Enter the highest port number used by the service If the service only uses a single port number enter the same number in both fields 5 Click Apply The new service will now appear in the Services menu and in the Service name selection box in the Rules menu Using Inbound Outbound Rules to Block or Allow Services Firewall rules are used to block or allow specific traffic passing through from one side of the wireless firewal
263. ows Internet Access Method 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button point to Settings and then click Control Panel 2 Double click the Internet Options icon 3 Select I want to set up my Internet connection manually or I want to connect through a Local Area Network and click Next 4 Select I want to connect through a Local Area Network and click Next C 4 Preparing Your Network 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 5 Uncheck all boxes in the LAN Internet Configuration screen and click Next 6 Proceed to the end of the Wizard Verifying TCP IP Properties After your PC is configured and has rebooted you can check the TCP IP configuration using the utility winipcfg exe 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and then click Run 2 Type winipefg and then click OK The IP Configuration window opens which lists among other things your IP address subnet mask and default gateway 3 From the drop down box select your Ethernet adapter The window is updated to show your settings which should match the values below if you are using the default TCP IP settings that NETGEAR recommends e The IP address is between 192 168 0 2 and 192 168 0 254 e The subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 e The default gateway is 192 168 0 1 Configuring Windows NT 2000 or XP for IP Networking As part of the PC preparatio
264. page 8 39 Note Selecting ANY for the Traffic Selectors means all traffic goes through the IPSec tunnel and prevents access to the Internet Type the starting LAN IP Address of the FWG114P v2 in the Local IP Start IP Address field For this example we used 192 168 0 0 which is the default LAN IP address of the FWGI114P v2 This will also be entered in the VPN Client Connection Remote Party Identity and Addressing Subnet field as seen in Security Policy Editor New Connection on page 8 39 Type the LAN Subnet Mask of the FWG114P v2 255 255 255 0 in our example in the Local IP Subnet Mask field This will also be entered in the VPN Client Connection Remote Party Identity and Addressing Mask field as seen in Security Policy Editor New Connection on page 8 39 From the Traffic Selector Remote IP drop down box select Single addresses Type 0 0 0 0 as the start IP Address of the in the Remote IP Start IP Address field because we are assuming the remote PC will have a dynamically assigned IP address This will also be entered in the VPN Client My Identity Internal Network IP Address field as seen in My Identity on page 8 40 Select the Enable Encryption check box This will also be selected in the VPN Client Security Policy Key Exchange Phase 2 Encapsulation Protocol ESP check box as seen in Connection Security Policy Key Exchange Phase 2 on page 8 43 From the ESP Configuration Encryption Algo
265. pically there are three WEP Encryption options available for 802 11 products 1 Do Not Use WEP The 802 11 network does not encrypt data For authentication purposes the network uses Open System Authentication 2 Use WEP for Encryption A transmitting 802 11 device encrypts the data portion of every packet it sends using a configured WEP Key The receiving device decrypts the data using the same WEP Key For authentication purposes the network uses Open System Authentication 3 Use WEP for Authentication and Encryption A transmitting 802 11 device encrypts the data portion of every packet it sends using a configured WEP Key The receiving device decrypts the data using the same WEP Key For authentication purposes the wireless network uses Shared Key Authentication Note Some 802 11 access points also support Use WEP for Authentication Only Shared Key Authentication without data encryption Wireless Networking Basics E 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Key Size The IEEE 802 11 standard supports two types of WEP encryption 40 bit and 128 bit The 64 bit WEP data encryption method allows for a five character 40 bit input Additionally 24 factory set bits are added to the forty bit input to generate a 64 bit encryption key The 24 factory set bits are not user configurable This encryption key will be used to encrypt decrypt all data transmit
266. ple we have used toFVS328 Enter a Local IPSec Identifier name for the NETGEAR FVS318 Gateway A This name must be entered in the other endpoint as Remote IPSec Identifier In this example we used 14 15 16 17 as the local identifier Enter a Remote IPSec Identifier name for the remote NETGEAR FWG114P v2 Gateway B This name must be entered in the other endpoint as Local IPSec Identifier In this example we used 22 23 24 25 as the remote identifier Choose a subnet from local address from the Tunnel can be accessed from pull down menu Type the starting LAN IP Address of Gateway A 10 5 6 1 in our example in the Local IP Local LAN start IP Address field Type the finishing LAN IP Address of Gateway A 0 0 0 0 in our example in the Local IP Local LAN finish IP Address field Type the LAN Subnet Mask of Gateway A 255 255 255 0 in our example in the Local LAN IP Subnetmask field NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 G 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Choose a subnet from local address from the Tunnel can access pull down menu Type the starting LAN IP Address of Gateway B 172 23 9 1 in our example in the Local IP Remote LAN Start IP Address field Type the finishing LAN IP Address of Gateway B 0 0 0 0 in our example in the Local IP Remote LAN Finish IP Address field Type the LA
267. points can be optimally placed SSID also called ESSID A 32 character unique identifier attached to the header of packets sent over a WLAN that acts as a password when a mobile device tries to connect to the BSS Also called ESSID The SSID differentiates one WLAN from another so all access points and all devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID A device will not be permitted to join the BSS unless it can provide the unique SSID Because an SSID can be sniffed in plain text from a packet it does not supply any security to the network An SSID is also referred to as a Network Name because essentially it is a name that identifies a wireless network SSL Secure Sockets Layer Commonly used encryption scheme used by many online retail and banking sites to protect the financial integrity of transactions When an SSL session begins the server sends its public key to the browser The browser then sends a randomly generated secret key back to the server in order to have a secret key exchange for that session Subnetwork or Subnet Found in larger networks these smaller networks are used to simplify addressing between numerous computers Subnets connect to the central network through a router hub or gateway Each individual wireless LAN will probably use the same subnet for all the local computers it talks to Switch A type of hub that efficiently controls the way multiple devices use the same network so that ea
268. protect your network from attacks and intrusions Since user level applications such as FTP and Web browsers can create complex patterns of network traffic it is necessary for the firewall to analyze groups of network connection states Using stateful packet inspection an incoming packet is intercepted at the network layer and then analyzed for state related information associated with all network connections A central cache within the firewall keeps track of the state information associated with all network connections All traffic passing through the firewall is analyzed against the state of these connections in order to determine whether or not it will be allowed to pass through or be rejected Denial of Service Attack A hacker may be able to prevent your network from operating or communicating by launching a Denial of Service DoS attack The method used for such an attack can be as simple as merely flooding your site with more requests than it can handle A more sophisticated attack may attempt to exploit some weakness in the operating system used by your router or gateway Some operating systems can be disrupted by simply sending a packet with incorrect length information Ethernet Cabling Although Ethernet networks originally used thick or thin coaxial cable most installations currently use unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling The UTP cable contains eight conductors arranged in four twisted pairs and terminated with an RJ45 type
269. rdware upgrades to implement Wi Fi Protected Access for the Enterprise Wi Fi Protected Access effectively addresses the WLAN security requirements for the enterprise and provides a strong encryption and authentication solution prior to the ratification of the IEEE 802 111 standard In an enterprise with IT resources Wi Fi Protected Access should be used in conjunction with an authentication server such as RADIUS to provide centralized access control and management With this implementation in place the need for add on solutions such as VPNs may be eliminated at least for the express purpose of securing the wireless link in a network Wi Fi Protected Access for Home SOHO In a home or Small Office Home Office SOHO environment where there are no central authentication servers or EAP framework Wi Fi Protected Access runs in a special home mode This mode also called Pre Shared Key PSK allows the use of manually entered keys or passwords and is designed to be easy to set up for the home user All the home user needs to do is enter a password also called a master key in their access point or home wireless gateway and each PC that is on the Wi Fi wireless network Wi Fi Protected Access takes over automatically from that point First the password allows only devices with a matching password to join the network which keeps out eavesdroppers and other unauthorized users Second the password automatically kicks off the TKIP encryption process de
270. re Printing the Full Manual Use the Complete PDF Manual link at the top left of any page Click the Complete PDF Manual link at the top left of any page in the manual The PDF version of the complete manual opens in a browser window Click the print icon in the upper left of the window Tip If your printer supports printing two pages on a single sheet of paper you can save paper and printer ink by selecting this feature About This Manual 1 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 1 4 About This Manual 201 10301 02 May 2005 Chapter 2 Introduction This chapter describes the features of the NETGEAR ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Key Features of the FWG114P v2 The ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 with a 4 port switch connects your LAN to the Internet through a broadband modem With auto fail over connectivity through the serial port the FWG114P v2 provides highly reliable Internet access The FWG114P v2 is a complete security solution that protects your network from attacks and intrusions and enables secure communications using Virtual Private Networks VPNs Unlike simple Internet sharing routers that rely on Network Address Translation NAT for security the FWG114P v2 uses Stateful Packet Inspection for Denial of Service attack DoS attack protection and intrusion
271. re Also the Identity below must be established by IP address e Aggressive Mode is faster but less secure The Identity below can be by name host name domain name e mail address and so on instead of by IP address Local Local Identity Type Local Identity Data These parameters apply to the Local FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server Use this field to identify the local FWG114P v2 You can choose one of the following four options from the drop down list By its Internet WAN port IP address e By its Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN your domain name By a Fully Qualified User Name your name E mail address or other ID By DER ASN 1 DN the binary DER encoding of your ASN 1 X 500 Distinguished Name This field lets you identify the local FWG114P v2 by name 8 4 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table 8 1 IKE Policy Configuration Fields Field Description Remote Remote Identity Type Remote Identity Data These parameters apply to the target remote FWG114P v2 VPN gateway or VPN client Use this field to identify the remote FWG114P v2 You can choose one of the following four options from the drop down list By its Internet WAN port IP address e By its Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN your domain name e By a Fully Qualified U
272. reason use the security features of your wireless equipment The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server provides highly effective security features which are covered in detail in this chapter Wireless Data Security Options Radius Up to 300 Feet 1 No Security Easy but no security ice 2 MAC Access List No data security 3 WEP Security but some performance impact 4 WPA or WPA PSK Very strong security P 4 ae Figure 4 1 FWG114P v2 wireless data security options There are several ways you can enhance the security of your wireless network e Restrict Access Based on MAC Address You can allow only trusted PCs to connect so that unknown PCs cannot wirelessly connect to the FWG114P v2 Restricting access by MAC address adds an obstacle against unwanted access to your network but the data broadcast over the wireless link is fully exposed e Turn Off the Broadcast of the Wireless Network Name SSID If you disable broadcast of the SSID only devices that have the correct SSID can connect This nullifies wireless network discovery feature of some products such as Windows XP but the data is still exposed e WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP data encryption provides data security WEP Shared Key authentication and WEP data encryption will block all but the most determined eavesdropper 4 2 Wireless Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewal
273. reless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 DynDNS service Gateway B will use the DDNS Service Provider when establishing a VPN tunnel In order to establish VPN connectivity Gateway A must be configured to use Dynamic DNS and Gateway B must be configured to use a DNS hostname to find Gateway A provided by a DDNS Service Provider Again the following step by step procedures assume that you have already registered with a DDNS Service Provider and have the configuration information necessary to set up the gateways Step By Step Configuration of FVS318 or FVM318 Gateway A 1 Log in to the FVS318 or FVM318 labeled Gateway A as in the illustration Out of the box the FVS318 or FVM318 is set for its default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with its default user name of admin and default password of password For this example we will assume you have set the local LAN address as 10 5 6 1 for Gateway A and have set your own password 2 Click Dynamic DNS on the left side of the Settings management GUI 3 Access the Web site of one of the dynamic DNS service providers whose names appear in the Use a dynamic DNS service list and register for an account For example for dyndns org click the link or go to www dyndns org Dynamic DNS Use a dynamic DNS service None DynDNs org Click here for information TzZ0 com Click here for free trial oray net Click here for information DynDNS Host and Domain Nam
274. rise level User Authentication via 802 1x EAP and RADIUS cenen E12 WPA Data Encryption Key Management cescsessessesseeseesseeseeseeeeaeeaees E 14 Contents 201 10301 02 May 2005 xi Is WPA Perfect A vee E 16 Product Support n WPA ee 3 i Supporting a Mixture of WPA pen WEP gt Wireless s Clients is is esi icone E16 Changes to Wireless ACCESS Points cccccccssesscssceeeccssecsecssecsecsseeecsseenseeas E 17 Changes to Wireless Network Adapters ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeesteeteeeees EXT 7 Changes to Wireless Client Programs cccceecseeeeeeeeeetteetteeeeettttteteeeeeee E18 Appendix F Virtual Private Networking ALIS a VENT aise eRe RAE Eh ERE F 1 What is IPSec and How Dos NOR aurrai a a E IPSec Secimty FealuleS aorssriokiiieniaa a ne Poeg Camponemie ect sratperasriicas coun es sindvapinuatan tin Mialtesdan Maetauanlanatimearads Encapsulating Security Payload ESP E E E E E T TA Authentication Header AH serrsicsunssnansnininounnnnnna a IKE Docuit ASSOCIO aia anaon AANS EEEE NE ANN F Mode Key nee MT Ton Tene aT CCU Tener eT TT Ie ae Trey Teer entree F 6 Understand the Process Before You Segi ee EE E E EE AE E EES ASE E T F 6 VPN Process Overview i a F 7 Network Interfaces and Addresses cccccececeenceeeceeeeeesaeeeeaeeeeeeceaeeceaeeetaeenaeenaas F 7 Interface Addressing ee ree rere rrr rere errr rr errr Te ary Firewalls s
275. ristics Policy Name The descriptive name of the VPN policy Each policy should have a unique policy name This name is not supplied to the remote VPN endpoint It is only used to help you identify VPN policies IKE Policy The existing IKE policies are presented in a drop down list Note Create the IKE policy BEFORE creating a VPN Auto policy Remote VPN Endpoint The address used to locate the remote VPN firewall or client to which you wish to connect The remote VPN endpoint must have this FWG114P v2 s Local IP values entered as its Remote VPN Endpoint e By its Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN your domain name By its IP Address Address Type The address type used to locate the remote VPN firewall or client to which you wish to connect e By its Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN your domain name By its IP Address Address Data The address used to locate the remote VPN firewall or client to which you wish to connect The remote VPN endpoint must have this FWG114P v2 s Local Identity Data entered as its Remote VPN Endpoint e By its Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN your domain name By its IP Address SA Life Time The duration of the Security Association before it expires e Seconds the amount of time before the SA expires Over an hour is common 3600 e Kbytes the amount of traffic before the SA expires One of these can be set without setting the other IPSec PFS If enabl
276. rithm drop down box select 3DES This will also be entered in the VPN Client Security Policy Key Exchange Phase 2 Encrypt Alg field as seen in Connection Security Policy Key Exchange Phase 2 on page 8 43 Virtual Private Networking 8 37 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Select Enable Authentication in the ESP Configuration Enable Authentication check box Note Do not confuse this with the Authentication Protocol AH option Using the AH option will prevent clients behind a home NAT router from connecting From the ESP Configuration Authentication Algorithm drop down box select SHA 1 This will also be entered in the VPN Client Security Policy Key Exchange Phase 2 Hash Alg field as seen in Connection Security Policy Key Exchange Phase 2 on page 8 43 Select the NETBIOS Enable check box to enable networking features like Windows Network Neighborhood Click Apply to save your changes You will be taken back to the VPN Policies Menu page 4 When the screen returns to the VPN Policies make sure the Enable check box is selected Click Apply to save your changes Step By Step Configuration of the Netgear VPN Client Note The Netgear ProSafe VPN Client has the ability to Import a predefined configuration profile The FWG114P v2 SPD file on the ProSafe Wireless 802 11g Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Resource CD for
277. rk traffic Advertisement Time To Live The time to live for the advertisement is measured in hops steps for each UPnP packet sent The time to live hop count is the number of steps a broadcast packet is allowed to propagate for each UPnP advertisement before it disappears The number of hops can range from 1 to 255 The default value for the advertisement time to live is 4 hops which should be fine for most home networks If you notice that some devices are not being updated or reached correctly then it may be necessary to increase this value a little UPnP Portmap Table The UPnP Portmap Table displays the IP address of each UPnP device that is currently accessing the router and which ports Internal and External that device has opened The UPnP Portmap Table also displays what type of port is opened and if that port is still active for each IP address Advanced Wireless Settings Note Incorrectly changing these settings can prevent the wireless functions from working Advanced Wireless Settings WMM support C Enable Disable RTS Threshold 0 2432 default 2432 2432 Fragmentention Length 256 2346 default 2346 2346 Beacon Interval 20 1000 default 100 100 DTIM 1 255 default 1 1 Long Short Preamble Type default Dynamic Apply Cancel Figure 10 5 Advanced Wireless Settings menu C Dynamic 10 12 Advanced Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 1
278. rovided with your operating system or networking software to install TCP IP on your computer Preparing Your Network C 1 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 In your IP network each PC and the firewall must be assigned unique IP addresses Each PC must also have certain other IP configuration information such as a subnet mask netmask a domain name server DNS address and a default gateway address In most cases you should install TCP IP so that the PC obtains its specific network configuration information automatically from a DHCP server during bootup For a detailed explanation of the meaning and purpose of these configuration items refer to Appendix B Networks Routing and Firewall Basics The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server is shipped preconfigured as a DHCP server The firewall assigns the following TCP IP configuration information automatically when the computers are rebooted e PC or workstation IP addresses 192 168 0 2 through 192 168 0 254 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 e Gateway address the firewall 192 168 0 1 These addresses are part of the IETF designated private address range for use in private networks Configuring Windows 95 98 and Me for TCP IP Networking As part of the PC preparation process you need to manually install and configure TCP IP on each networked PC Before starting locate your Windows CD
279. rs and do not conform to network security policies and may present a severe security risk Ideally it is best to have some type of WLAN system that does not allow rogue access points to easily be added to an existing WLAN Router A device that forwards data packets from one local area network LAN or wide area network WAN to another Based on routing tables and routing protocols routers can read the network address in each transmitted frame and make a decision on how to send it via the most efficient route based on traffic load line costs speed bad connections etc Glossary 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Satellite broadband A wireless high speed Internet connection provided by satellites Some satellite broadband connections are two way up and down Others are one way with the satellite providing a high speed downlink and then using a dial up telephone connection or other land based system for the uplink to the Internet Server A computer that provides its resources to other computers and devices on a network These include print servers Internet servers and data servers A server can also be combined with a hub or router Site survey The process whereby a wireless network installer inspects a location prior to putting in a wireless network Site surveys are used to identify the radio and client use properties of a facility so that access
280. rtificate Figure 8 20 Self Certificates table 7 Associate the new certificate and the Trusted Root CA certificate on the FWG114P v2 a Create a new IKE policy called Scenario_2 with all the same properties of Scenario_1 see Scenario 1 IKE Policy on page 8 22 except now use the RSA Signature instead of the shared key IKE SA Parameters Encryption Algorithm 3DES Authentication Algorithm SHA 1 x Authentication Method Pre shared Key RSA Signature requires Certificate Diffie Hellman DH Group Group 2 1024 Bit SA Life Time 2000 secs Figure 8 21 IKE policy using RSA Signature b Create a new VPN Auto Policy called scenario2a with all the same properties as scenariola except that it uses the IKE policy called Scenario_2 8 30 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Now the traffic from devices within the range of the LAN subnet addresses on FWG114P v2 A and Gateway B will be authenticated using the certificates rather than via a shared key 8 Set up Certificate Revocation List CRL checking a c d e Get a copy of the CRL from the CA and save it as a text file Note The procedure for obtaining a CRL differs from a CA like Verisign and a CA such as a Windows 2000 certificate server which an organization operates for providing certificates for its members Follow the proce
281. ry Day or select one or more days If you want to limit access completely for the selected days select All Day Otherwise If you want to limit access during certain times for the selected days type a Start Time and an End Time 6 12 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Note Enter the values in 24 hour time format For example 10 30 am would be 10 hours and 30 minutes and 10 30 pm would be 22 hours and 30 minutes Be sure to click Apply when you have finished configuring this menu Setting the Time Zone The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server uses the Network Time Protocol NTP to obtain the current time and date from one of several Network Time Servers on the Internet In order to localize the time for your log entries you must specify your Time Zone e Time Zone Select your local time zone This setting will be used for the blocking schedule and for time stamping log entries e Daylight Savings Time Select this check box for daylight savings time Note If your region uses Daylight Savings Time you must manually select Adjust for Daylight Savings Time on the first day of Daylight Savings Time and unselect it at the end Enabling Daylight Savings Time will add one hour to the standard time Be sure to click Apply when you have finished configuring this menu Getting E Mail Notifications of Event
282. s Help x lt tal NETGEAR N Network Security Policy My Connections Connection Security FWG114P Secure n IF Only Connect Manually G My Identity Non secure 2 E a Security Policy Qp Other Connections Block Remote Party Identity and Addressing ID Type IP Subnet sa Subnet 192 168 0 0 Mask 255 255 255 0 Protocol All X Port b Connect using Secure Gateway Tunnel x ID Type Domain Name Gateway IP Address v F S328 66 120 188 153 Figure 8 25 Security Policy Editor New Connection a Run the Security Policy Editor program and create a VPN Connection File Edie Help a all Connections None Networl Global Policy Settings Policy Management Certificate Settings Specified Connections Certificate Manager Figure 8 26 Security Policy Editor Options menu Virtual Private Networking 8 39 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Note If the configuration settings on this screen are not available for editing go to the Options menu select Secure and Specified Options to enable editing these settings From the Edit menu of the Security Policy Editor click Add then Connection A New Connection listing appears Rename the New Connection to FWG114P v2 b Ensure that the following settings are configured Inthe Connection Securit
283. s SSID e Shared Key Authentication requires that the station and the access point have the same WEP Key to authenticate These two authentication procedures are described below Open System Authentication The following steps occur when two devices use Open System Authentication 1 The station sends an authentication request to the access point Wireless Networking Basics E 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 The access point authenticates the station 3 The station associates with the access point and joins the network This process is illustrated below Open System Authentication Steps 1 Authentication request sent to AP 2 AP authenticates a Access Point AP h ME Se INTERNET Cable or DLS modem n 3 Client connects to network Client attempting to connect ICICI Servers PCs Figure E 1 Open system authentication Shared Key Authentication The following steps occur when two devices use Shared Key Authentication 1 The station sends an authentication request to the access point 2 The access point sends challenge text to the station 3 The station uses its configured 64 bit or 128 bit default key to encrypt the challenge text and sends the encrypted text to the access point 4 The access point decrypts the encrypted text using its configured WEP Key that corresp
284. s are encrypted using a key which is automatically generated WPA2 with Radius WPA2 is a later version of WPA Only select this if all clients support WPA2 If selected you must use AES encryption and configure the Radius Server Settings Each user Wireless Client must have a user login on the Radius Server normally done via a digital certificate Also this device must have a client login on the Radius server Data transmissions are encrypted using a key which is automatically generated WPA and WPA2 with Radius This selection allows clients to use either WPA with AES encryption or WPA2 with TKIP encryption If selected encryption must be TKIP AES If selected you must configure the Radius Server Settings WPA PSK Wi Fi Protected Access Pre Shared Key Use WPA PSK standard encryption WPA2 PSK WPA2 is a later version of WPA Only select this if all clients support WPA2 If selected you must use AES encryption and enter the WPA passphrase Network key WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK This selection allows clients to use either WPA with AES encryption or WPA2 with TKIP encryption If selected encryption must be TKIP AES Wireless Configuration 4 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Default Factory Settings The FWG114P v2 default factory settings shown below You can restore these defaults with the Factory Default Restore button on
285. s class has been determined the software can correctly identify the host section of the address The following figure shows the three main address classes including network and host sections of the address for each address type B 2 Networks Routing and Firewall Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Class A _ 6h hlULtC LSS Network Node Class B Network Node Class C Network Node Figure 11 1 Three Main Address Classes The five address classes are e Class A Class A addresses can have up to 16 777 214 hosts on a single network They use an eight bit network number and a 24 bit node number Class A addresses are in this range 1 x x x to 126 x x x e Class B Class B addresses can have up to 65 354 hosts on a network A Class B address uses a 16 bit network number and a 16 bit node number Class B addresses are in this range 128 1 x x to 191 254 x x e Class C Class C addresses can have 254 hosts on a network Class C addresses use 24 bits for the network address and eight bits for the node They are in this range 192 0 1 x to 223 255 254 x e Class D Class D addresses are used for multicasts messages sent to many hosts Class D addresses are in this range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 e Class E Class E addresses are for experimental use Networks Routing and Firewall Ba
286. s listed below then follow the how to procedure 5 4 Serial Port Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005M 10207 01 Reference Manual v2 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Basic Requirements for Dial in Dial in requires these elements 1 A broadband connection to the FWG114P v2 2 An analog phone line 3 A serial modem properly configured and attached to the DB9 connector on the serial port 4 The Dial in settings configured and applied to the FWG114P v2 How to Configure Dial in Follow the steps below to configure a serial port dial in connection 1 Configure a serial port modem according to the instructions above 2 From the Serial Port section of the main menu click Dial in Serial Port Dial in Dial in Settings Enable Dial in Dial in PPP Authentication PAP v C Disconnect after Idle Time of 15 minutes Dial in Users Name Enabled Call Back O 1 guest Disable Disable Add Edit Delete Figure 5 3 Serial Port Dial in settings screen 3 Configure the Dial in settings 4 Click Apply for the changes to take effect Serial Port Configuration 5 5 201 10301 02 May 2005M 10207 01 Reference Manual v2 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Configuring LAN to LAN Settings LAN to LAN enables direct communications between two FWG114P v2 wireless firewall print serv
287. s required If so select BigPond or PPTP from the Internet Service Type drop down box 2 Enter your Account Name may also be called Host Name and Domain Name These parameters may be necessary to access your ISP s services such as mail or news servers 3 If needed enter the PPPoE login user name and password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive To change the login timeout enter a new value in minutes Note You will no longer need to run the ISP s login program on your computer in order to access the Internet When you start an Internet application your firewall automatically logs you in 4 You should only disable NAT if you are sure you do not require it NAT automatically assigns private IP addresses for example 192 168 0 x to LAN connected devices When NAT is disabled only standard routing is performed by this router Note Disabling NAT will reboot the router and reset all the FWG114P v2 configuration settings to the factory default Disable NAT only if you plan to install the FWG114P v2 ina setting where you will be manually administering the IP address space on the LAN side of the router 5 Internet IP Address If your ISP assigned you a permanent fixed IP address for your computer select Use Static IP Address Enter the IP address your ISP assigned Also enter the IP Subnet Mask and the Gateway IP address The Gateway is the ISP s router to which your firewall will connect 6 Domain Name
288. s will take you to the IPSec Connection Status Screen If the connection is functioning properly the State fields will show Estab 3 From the FVS328 click the VPN Status link under the VPN section of the main menu The VPN Logs and status are displayed NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 H 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 H 12 NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Glossary Use the list below to find definitions for technical terms used in this manual 802 11 Standard 802 11 or IEEE 802 11 is a type of radio technology used for wireless local area networks WLANs It is a standard that has been developed by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers http standards ieee org The IEEE is an international organization that develops standards for hundreds of electronic and electrical technologies The organization uses a series of numbers like the Dewey Decimal system in libraries to differentiate between the various technology families The 802 subgroup of the IEEE develops standards for local and wide area networks with the 802 11 section reviewing and creating standards for wireless local area networks Wi Fi 802 11 is composed of several standar
289. scribed above Wi Fi Protected Access for Public Access The intrinsic encryption and authentication schemes defined in Wi Fi Protected Access may also prove useful for Wireless Internet Service Providers WISPs offering Wi Fi public access in hot spots where secure transmission and authentication is particularly important to users unknown to each other The authentication capability defined in the specification enables a secure access control mechanism for the service providers and for mobile users not utilizing VPN connections Glossary 13 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Wi Fi Protected Access in Mixed Mode Deployment In a large network with many clients a likely scenario is that access points will be upgraded before all the Wi Fi clients Some access points may operate in a mixed mode which supports both clients running Wi Fi Protected Access and clients running original WEP security While useful for transition the net effect of supporting both types of client devices is that security will operate at the less secure level WEP common to all the devices Therefore organizations will benefit by accelerating the move to Wi Fi Protected Access for all Wi Fi clients and access points WiMAX An IEEE 802 16 Task Group that provides a specification for fixed broadband wireless access systems employing a point to multipoint PMP architecture Task Gro
290. ser Name your name e mail address or other ID e By DER ASN 1 DN the binary DER encoding of your ASN 1 X 500 Distinguished Name This field lets you identify the target remote FWG114P v2 by name IKE SA Parameters Encryption Algorithm Authentication Algorithm Authentication Method Pre Shared Key RSA Signature Diffie Hellman D H Group SA Life Time These parameters determine the properties of the IKE Security Association Choose the encryption algorithm for this IKE policy DES is the default e 3DES is more secure If you enable Authentication Header AH this menu lets you to select from these authentication algorithms e MD5 is the default SHA 1 is more secure You may select Pre Shared Key or RSA Signature Specify the key according to the requirements of the Authentication Algorithm you selected For MD5 the key length should be 16 bytes e For SHA 1 the key length should be 20 bytes RSA Signature requires a certificate The DH Group setting determines the bit size used in the key exchange This must match the value used on the remote VPN gateway or client The amount of time in seconds before the Security Association expires over an hour 3600 is common Virtual Private Networking 8 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 VPN Policy Configuration for Auto Key Negotiati
291. set up in the earlier step this being the FVS318 IKE Policy From the Remote VPN Endpoint Address Type drop down box select IP Address Type the WAN IP Address of Gateway A 14 15 16 17 in our example in the Remote VPN Endpoint Address Data field Type 300 in the SA Life Time Seconds field Type 0 in the SA Life Time Kbytes field Check the IPSec PFS check box From the PFS Key Group drop down box select Group 2 1024 Bit From the Traffic Selector Local IP drop down box select Subnet address Type the starting LAN IP Address of Gateway B 172 23 9 1 in our example in the Local IP Start IP Address field Type the finishing LAN IP Address of Gateway B 0 0 0 0 in our example in the Local IP Finish IP Address field NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 G 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Type the LAN Subnet Mask of Gateway B 255 255 255 0 in our example in the Local IP Subnet Mask field Remote IP Subnet address Start IP address 10 4 J6 Finish IP address t s Subnet Mask 255 j255 j255 PEC AH Configuration T Enable Authentication authentication Algorithm MD5 ESP Configuration M Enable Encryption Encryption Algontnm 3DES M Enable Authentication authentication Agorithm MD5 M NETBIOS Enable Back Apply _Concel Figur
292. sics B 3 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 This addressing structure allows IP addresses to uniquely identify each physical network and each node on each physical network For each unique value of the network portion of the address the base address of the range host address of all zeros is known as the network address and is not usually assigned to a host Also the top address of the range host address of all ones is not assigned but is used as the broadcast address for simultaneously sending a packet to all hosts with the same network address Netmask In each of the address classes previously described the size of the two parts network address and host address is implied by the class This partitioning scheme can also be expressed by a netmask associated with the IP address A netmask is a 32 bit quantity that when logically combined using an AND operator with an IP address yields the network address For instance the netmasks for Class A B and C addresses are 255 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 and 255 255 255 0 respectively For example the address 192 168 170 237 is a Class C IP address whose network portion is the upper 24 bits When combined using an AND operator with the Class C netmask as shown here only the network portion of the address remains 11000000 10101000 10101010 11101101 192 168 170 237 combined with 11111111 11111111 3211111
293. size under MTU Size enter a new size between 64 and 1500 Then click Apply to save the new configuration e Setting the WAN Port Speed In most cases your router can automatically determine AutoSense the connection speed of the Internet WAN port If you cannot establish an Internet connection and the Internet LED blinks continuously you may need to manually select the port speed If you know that the Ethernet port on your broadband modem supports 100BaseT select 100M otherwise select 10M How to Configure Dynamic DNS If your network has a permanently assigned IP address you can register a domain name and have that name linked with your IP address by public Domain Name Servers DNS However if your Internet account uses a dynamically assigned IP address you will not know in advance what your IP address will be and the address can change frequently In this case you can use a commercial dynamic DNS service which will allow you to register your domain to their IP address and will forward traffic directed to your domain to your frequently changing IP address The router contains a client that can connect to a dynamic DNS service provider To use this feature you must select a service provider and obtain an account with them After you have configured your account information in the router whenever your ISP assigned IP address changes your router will automatically contact your dynamic DNS service provider log in to your
294. sk Gateway IP Address Domain Name Server DNS Address Get Automatically From ISP Ouse These DNS Servers Primary DNS Secondary DNS Router s MAC Address Use Default Address Use This Computer s MAC Use This MAC Address Apply Cancel Test ISP Does Require Login Basic Seftings pe of Internet Connection do you have adband No login roadband with Login username password Serial Port Modem or ISDN Internet Service Provider Name Other PPPoE Account Name Domain Name Login guest Password idle Timeout 5 Minutes Domain Name Server DNS Address Get Automatically From ISP Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS Secondary DNS Routers MAC Address Use Default Address O use This Computer s MAC O Use This MAC Address 00 09 Sb 2a a9 c5 Figure 3 13 Browser based configuration Basic Settings menu Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 How to Manually Configure the Primary Internet Connection Use these steps to manually configure the primary Internet connection in the Basic Settings menu 1 Select your Internet connection type broadband with or without login or serial Note If you are a Telstra BigPond broadband customer or if you are in an area such as Austria that uses broadband PPTP login i
295. some protection because by the very nature of the Network Address Translation NAT process the network behind the NAT router is shielded from access by outsiders on the Internet However there are methods by which a determined hacker can possibly obtain information about your network or at the least can disrupt your Internet access A greater degree of protection is provided by a firewall router B 10 Networks Routing and Firewall Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 What is a Firewall A firewall is a device that protects one network from another while allowing communication between the two A firewall incorporates the functions of the NAT router while adding features for dealing with a hacker intrusion or attack Several known types of intrusion or attack can be recognized when they occur When an incident is detected the firewall can log details of the attempt and can optionally send e mail to an administrator notifying them of the incident Using information from the log the administrator can take action with the ISP of the hacker In some types of intrusions the firewall can fend off the hacker by discarding all further packets from the hacker s IP address for a period of time Stateful Packet Inspection Unlike simple Internet sharing routers a firewall uses a process called stateful packet inspection to ensure secure firewall filtering to
296. spoof the MAC address from the authorized computer Refer to Manually Configuring Your Internet Connection on page 3 18 Restoring the Default Configuration and Password This section explains how to restore the factory default configuration settings changing the router s administration password to password and the IP address to 192 168 0 1 You can erase the current configuration and restore factory defaults in two ways e Use the Erase function of the router see Erasing the Configuration on page 9 9 e Use the Default Reset button on the rear panel of the router Use this method for cases when the administration password or IP address is not known To restore the factory default configuration settings without knowing the administration password or IP address you must use the Default Reset button on the rear panel of the router 1 Press and hold the Default Reset button until the Test LED turns on about 10 seconds 2 Release the Default Reset button and wait for the router to reboot Problems with Date and Time The E Mail menu in the Content Filtering section displays the current date and time of day The FWGI114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server uses the Network Time Protocol NTP to obtain the current time from one of several Network Time Servers on the Internet Each entry in the log is stamped with the date and time of day Problems with the date and time function can include e Date shown is January 1 2
297. ss point products support 802 1x E 12 Wireless Networking Basics 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Client with a WPA enabled wireless adapter and supplicant Win XP Funk For example a For example a Meetinghouse WPA enabled AP RADIUS server L RS S SA supplican 1 B Authenticator Authenticating Server Identity Identity Request Credentials Request Credentials Credentials Credentials gt gt Authentication Authentication Uncontrolled Port LAN Resources Controlled Port Figure E 4 802 1x Authentication Sequence The AP sends Beacon Frames with WPA information element to the stations in the service set Information elements include the required authentication method 802 1x or Pre shared key and the preferred cipher suite WEP TKIP or AES Probe Responses AP to station and Association Requests station to AP also contain WPA information elements 1 Initial 802 1x communications begin with an unauthenticated supplicant client device attempting to connect with an authenticator 802 11 access point The client sends an EAP start message This begins a series of message exchanges to authenticate the client 2 The access point replies with an EAP request identity message Wireless Networking Basics E 13 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall
298. ss 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Record Your Internet Connection Information Print this page Fill in the configuration parameters from your Internet Service Provider ISP ISP Login Name The login name and password are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as given by your ISP For AOL customers the login name is their primary screen name Some ISPs use your full e mail address as the login name The Service Name is not required by all ISPs If you connect using a login name and password then fill in the following Login Name Password Service Name Fixed or Static IP Address If you have a static IP address record the following information For example 169 254 141 148 could be a valid IP address Fixed or Static Internet IP Address Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask ISP DNS Server Addresses If you were given DNS server addresses fill in the following Primary DNS Server IP Address Secondary DNS Server IP Address Host and Domain Names Some ISPs use a specific host or domain name like CCA7324 A or home If you have not been given host or domain names you can use the following examples as a guide e If your main e mail account with your ISP is aaa yyy com then use aaa as your host name Your ISP might call this your account user host computer or system name e If your ISP s mail server is mail xxx yyy com then use xxx yyy com as the domain name ISP Host Name ISP Domain Name
299. ss Point M Enable Wireless Access Point M Allow Broadcast of Name SSID Wireless Station Access List Setup Access List Wireless Security WPA with Radius Encryption TKIP Radius Server Settings Primary Server Name sIP Address Secondary Server NamellP Address Radius Part Shared Key Radius Accounting I Enable RADIUS Accounting Radius Accounting Port I Update Report every Minutes Apply Cancel Figure 4 6 Wireless Settings menu WPA with Radius 3 Select WPA with Radius on the pulldown menu The WPA with Radius menu will open Encryption There is no choice for encryption this is displayed for your information For WPA with Radius TKIP is used 4 Enter the Radius settings e Primary Server Name IP Address This field is required Enter the name or IP address of the primary Radius Server on your LAN e Secondary Radius Server Name IP Address This field is optional If you have a Secondary Radius Server on your LAN enter its name or IP address here Wireless Configuration 4 13 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Radius Port Enter the port number used for connecting to the Radius Server e Shared Key Enter the desired value for the Shared Key This must match the value used on the Radius server e Radius Accounting Enable Radius Accounting Enable this if you want to use the Radius Accounting system If enabl
300. ss sbisispssivisiivedo noord nvasnssseseed Setting Up a VPN Tucan Betre Gatai E E E EE E T F 8 VPNG IKE Securty Parameters sasccics cies sciccicainndeionionieeianediaedeciiabetasecaemeiticadncaieal O VPNG IKE Phase Parameters vison n be VPNC IKE Phase II Parameters aat Toing and Troubleshooting sesira a a UI Additional MINS ssresarariaii aea Mew aiate a ahtulireestialaetsaniiabunwun ube F 11 Appendix G NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 to FWG114P v2 Configuration Template RN tahini Step By Step Ccntiduistion of FVS318 0 or FVM318 a uted A E er Step By Step Configuration of FWG114P Gateway B ttt G5 Test the VPN Conneclion nanienudamowvinunnwaumuaununiusnwammianamiunmacdaee xii Contents 201 10301 02 May 2005 Appendix H NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 Configuration Template Sa a Ge ig ean eee ga rane aia ns x saa ete aiiaea aca H 1 Using DDNS and Fully Qualified Domain Names FQDN ceecceeeeeeeeeteeees H 2 Step By Step Configuration of FVS318 or FVM318 Gateway A eesse H 3 Step By Step Configuration of FVS328 Gateway B cccccccesseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeteaaeseeneees H 7 Tos ihe VPN COONOT ION sieni cme rem rece yr pre a a H 11 Glossary Contents xiii 201 10301 02 May 2005 xiv Contents 201 10301 02 May 2005 Chapter 1 About This Manual This chapter describes the intended audience scope conventions and formats of this manual Audience
301. ss to their visitors and guests In some parts of the world HotSpots are known as CoolSpots Hub A multiport device used to connect PCs to a network via Ethernet cabling or via Wi Fi Wired hubs can have numerous ports and can transmit data at speeds ranging from 10 Mbps to multigigabyte speeds per second A hub transmits packets it receives to all the connected ports A small wired hub may only connect 4 computers a large hub can connect 48 or more Wireless hubs can connect hundreds HZ hertz The international unit for measuring frequency equivalent to the older unit of cycles per second One megahertz MHz is one million hertz One gigahertz GHz is one billion hertz The standard US electrical power frequency is 60 Hz the AM broadcast radio frequency band is 535 1605 kHz the FM broadcast radio frequency band is 88 108 MHz and wireless 802 11b LANs operate at 2 4 GHz IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A membership organization www ieee org that includes engineers scientists and students in electronics and allied fields It has more than 300 000 members and is involved with setting standards for computers and communications IEEE 802 11 A set of specifications for LANs from The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE Most wired networks conform to 802 3 the specification for CSMA CD based Ethernet networks or 802 5 the specification for token ring networks 802 11 defines the st
302. swIDAQABoAAw DQYIKoZIhvcNaAQE FBQAaD gYEAtnimKz0zrZzeR6sbieaVv6 FddGavcl1jAs401ldRdkdi bx 1TrMg zfHvse0simPtQOMLSaVXFd6iFYHOF4aXxQpCitv FLces0Gvl Swqe0FIGa c1j18mRGa70MidtTY Rot PevIbs1T3B lAewT 3 4qNYRYEOVd9yFIAycRnggfHIPs cfU END CERTIFICATE REQUEST Back Done Cancel Figure 8 18 Self Certificate Request data 4 Transmit the Self Certificate Request data to the Trusted Root CA a Highlight the text in the Data to supply to CA area copy it and paste it into a text file b Give the certificate request data to the CA In the case of a Windows 2000 internal CA you might simply e mail it to the CA administrator The procedures of a CA like Verisign and a CA such as a Windows 2000 certificate server administrator will differ Follow the procedures of your CA 8 28 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 When you have finished gathering the Self Certificate Request data click the Done button You will return to the Certificates screen where your pending FWG114P v2 Self Certificate Request will be listed as illustrated in Figure 8 19 below Certificates Active Self Certificates Name Subject Name Issuer Name Expiry Time 1 Netgear FQDN netgear com O VPNC OU Conformance testing root 1 Mar 26 22 53 29 2011 GMT Self Certificate Requests Name Status 1 FWG1 14P Waiting f
303. t Enter the keys in the fields provided For MD5 the keys should be 16 characters e For SHA 1 the keys should be 20 characters Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Authentication Algorithm Key In field Encapsulated Security ESP provides security for the payload data sent through the VPN tunnel Payload ESP Configuration Generally you will want to enable both encryption and authentication when you use ESP Two ESP modes are available e Plain ESP encryption ESP encryption with authentication These settings must match the remote VPN endpoint SPI Incoming Enter a Hex value 3 8 chars Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Outgoing SPI field SPI Outgoing Enter a Hex value 3 8 chars Any value is acceptable provided the remote VPN endpoint has the same value in its Incoming SPI field Enable Encryption Use this checkbox to enable or disable ESP Encryption 8 12 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table 8 1 VPN Manual Policy Configuration Fields Field Description Encryption If you enable ESP Encryption then select the Encryption Algorithm Algorithm DES is the default e 3DES is more secure Key In Enter the key in the fields provided For DES the key should be 8 chara
304. t Key not Certificate based Date Tested December 2003 Model Firmware Tested Gateway FWG114P firmware v 2 2 Client NETGEAR ProSafe VPN Client v10 1 IP Addressing Gateway Static IP address Client Dynamic 8 32 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Network Addresses Gateway Client _ WAN IP WAN IP paces cee EE Se or H INTI Ly 132 168 0 0 66 120 188 153 0 0 0 0 FWG114P PC with NETGEAR ProSafe VPN client Figure 8 22 Addressing and Subnet Used for Examples Step By Step Configuration of FWG114P v2 Gateway 1 Log in to the FWG114P v2 gateway as in the illustration Out of the box the FWG114P v2 is set for its default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with its default user name of admin and default password of password Virtual Private Networking 8 33 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 Click IKE Policies under the VPN menu and click Add on the IKE Policies Menu IKE Policy Configuration General Policy Name Direction Type Exchange Mode Local Local Identity Type Local Identity Data Remote Remote Identity Type Remote Identity Data IKE SA Parameters Encryption Algorithm Authentication Algorithm Authentication Method Diffie Hellman DH Group SA Life Time mills Remote Access A
305. t contacts a DNS server to obtain the IP address of the resource The PC sends the desired message using the IP address Many large organizations such as ISPs maintain their own DNS servers and allow their customers to use the servers to look up addresses IP Configuration by DHCP When an IP based local area network is installed each PC must be configured with an IP address If the computers need to access the Internet they should also be configured with a gateway address and one or more DNS server addresses As an alternative to manual configuration there is a method by which each PC on the network can automatically obtain this configuration information A device on the network may act as a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server The DHCP server stores a list or pool of IP addresses along with other information such as gateway and DNS addresses that it may assign to the other devices on the network The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server has the capacity to act as a DHCP server The FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server also functions as a DHCP client when connecting to the ISP The firewall can automatically obtain an IP address subnet mask DNS server addresses and a gateway address if the ISP provides this information by DHCP Internet Security and Firewalls When your LAN connects to the Internet through a router an opportunity is created for outsiders to access or disrupt your network A NAT router provides
306. tandard and Offset Codebook is a robust data privacy scheme and is a longer term solution Security Association Management is addressed by a RSN Negotiation Procedures b IEEE 802 1x Authentication and c IEEE 802 1x Key management The standards are being defined to naturally co exist with pre RSN networks that are currently deployed 802 11n Standard A recently formed Oct 2003 IEEE official task group referred to as 802 11n or TGn for the 100 Mbps wireless physical layer standard protocol Current published ratification date is December 2005 As of February 2004 no draft specification has been written It is expected to use both the 2 4 and 5GHz frequencies AES Advanced Encryption Standard A symmetric 128 bit block data encryption technique developed by Belgian cryptographers Joan Daemen and Vincent Rijmen The U S government adopted the algorithm as its encryption technique in October 2000 replacing the DES encryption it used AES works at multiple network layers simultaneously The National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST of the U S Department of Commerce selected the algorithm called Rijndael pronounced Rhine Dahl or Rain Doll out of a group of five algorithms under consideration including one called MARS from a large research team at IBM AES is expected to replace WEP as a WLAN encryption method in 2003 Access Point AP A wireless LAN transceiver or base station that can connect a wired LAN to one or ma
307. te if this causes high connection costs you can disable this setting If disabled you must connect manually using the sub screen accessed from the Router Status menu Show WAN Status screen e Setting Up a Default DMZ Server Note DMZ servers pose a security risk A computer designated as the default DMZ server loses much of the protection of the firewall and is exposed to attacks from the Internet If compromised the DMZ server can be used to attack your network The use of the term DMZ has become common although it is a misnomer In traditional firewalls a DMZ is actually a separate physical network port A true DMZ port is for connecting servers that require greater access from the outside and will therefore be provided with a different level of security by the firewall A better term for our application is Exposed Host The default DMZ server feature is helpful when using some online games and videoconferencing applications that are incompatible with NAT The router is programmed to recognize some of these applications and to work properly with them but there are other applications that may not function well In some cases one local computer can run the application properly if that computer s IP address is entered as the default DMZ server Incoming traffic from the Internet is normally discarded by the router unless the traffic is a response to one of your local computers or a service that you have co
308. te site s corporate network address space The choices are ANY for all valid IP addresses in the Internet address space Note Selecting ANY means all traffic goes through the IPSec tunnel and prevents access to the Internet e Single IP Address e Range of IP Addresses e Subnet Address Authenticating Header AH Configuration Enable Authentication Authentication Algorithm AH specifies the authentication protocol for the VPN header These settings must match the remote VPN endpoint Use this checkbox to enable or disable AH for this VPN policy If you enable AH then select the authentication algorithm e MD5 is the default e SHA1 is more secure Encapsulated Security Payload ESP Configuration ESP provides security for the payload data sent through the VPN tunnel Generally you will want to enable both Encryption and Authentication Two ESP modes are available e Plain ESP encryption ESP encryption with authentication These settings must match the remote VPN endpoint Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Table 8 1 VPN Auto Policy Configuration Fields Field Description Enable Encryption Use this checkbox to enable or disable ESP Encryption Encryption If you enable ESP encryption then select the encryption algorithm Algorithm e DES is the default e 3DES is more secure
309. ted via the wireless interface Some vendors refer to the 64 bit WEP data encryption as 40 bit WEP data encryption since the user configurable portion of the encryption key is 40 bits wide The 128 bit WEP data encryption method consists of 104 user configurable bits Similar to the forty bit WEP data encryption method the remaining 24 bits are factory set and not user configurable Some vendors allow passphrases to be entered instead of the cryptic hexadecimal characters to ease encryption key entry 128 bit encryption is stronger than 40 bit encryption but 128 bit encryption may not be available outside of the United States due to U S export regulations When configured for 40 bit encryption 802 11 products typically support up to four WEP Keys Each 40 bit WEP Key is expressed as 5 sets of two hexadecimal digits 0 9 and A F For example 12 34 56 78 90 is a 40 bit WEP Key When configured for 128 bit encryption 802 11 products typically support four WEP Keys but some manufacturers support only one 128 bit key The 128 bit WEP Key is expressed as 13 sets of two hexadecimal digits 0 9 and A F For example 12 34 56 78 90 AB CD EF 12 34 56 78 90 is a 128 bit WEP Key Table E 1 Encryption Key Sizes Encryption Key Size of Hexadecimal Digits Example of Hexadecimal Key Content 64 bit 24 40 10 4C72F08AE1 128 bit 24 104 26 4C72F08AE19D57A3FF6B260037 Note Typically 802 11 access points can stor
310. ter contacts the router s DHCP server Reboot the computer or access its IP configuration and force a DHCP release and renew To edit or delete a reserved address entry 1 Click the button next to the reserved address you want to edit or delete 2 Click Edit or Delete Configuring Static Routes Static Routes provide additional routing information to your router Under normal circumstances the router has adequate routing information after it has been configured for Internet access and you do not need to configure additional static routes You must configure static routes only for unusual cases such as multiple routers or multiple IP subnets located on your network From the Main Menu of the browser interface under Advanced click on Static Routes to view the Static Route menu To add or edit a Static Route 1 Click the Add button to open the Static Routes menu 10 8 Advanced Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Static Routes Route Name isdn_rtr Active Private Destination IP Address 134 177 jo jel IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 192 168 0 100 Metric 2 Figure 10 3 Static Route Entry and Edit Menu 9 Type a route name for this static route in the Route Name box This is for identification purpose only Select Active to make this route effective Select Pri
311. terval Determines how often Windows will poll the print server to establish a connection when the printer is busy Print Server 7 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Troubleshooting the Print Server Note When the TCP IP LPR configuration is used if two long files are sent to the gt printer at once Windows will pop up a print failure error message This message can be ignored The file will print once the printer finishes printing the first file This does not happen when the Netgear Printer Port driver is used Question When I tried to install the Printer Driver for Peer to Peer printing I received an error message and the installation was aborted Answer This may be caused by an existing installation of the printer port software Before attempting another installation remove the existing installation and restart your PC To remove an existing printer port installation a Open Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs b Look for an entry with a name like NETGEAR ProSafe Firewall Router NETGEAR Print Server Print Server Driver or Print Server Port c Select this item click Add Remove and confirm the deletion Question I am using Windows 95 The Printer Driver installed and ran but when I selected a port and clicked Add the printer was not installed Answer Try installing t
312. the IPSec PFS check box From the PFS Key Group drop down box select Group 2 1024 Bit From the Traffic Selector Local IP drop down box select Subnet address Type the starting LAN IP Address of Gateway B 172 23 9 1 in our example in the Local IP Start IP Address field Type the finishing LAN IP Address of Gateway B 0 0 0 0 in our example in the Local IP Finish IP Address field Type the LAN Subnet Mask of Gateway B 255 255 255 0 in our example in the Local IP Subnet Mask field NETGEAR VPN Configuration FVS318 or FVM318 with FQDN to FVS328 H 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Remote IP Subnet adaress Start IP address 10 a fe lA Finish Paddress o J f p Subnet Mask fess fess 2ss fo AH Configuration T Enable Authentication authentication Agorithm MD5 ESP Configuration Enable Encryption Encryption Algorithm DES lt M Enable Authentication authentication Algorithm MD5 M NETBIOS Enable Beck Apply _Cancel Figure H 10 NETGEAR FVS328 VPN Auto Policy part 2 From the Traffic Selector Remote IP drop down box select Subnet address Type the starting LAN IP Address of Gateway A 10 5 6 1 in our example in the Remote IP Start IP Address field Type the finishing LAN IP Address of Gateway A 0 0 0 0 in our example in the Remote IP Finish IP Address field Type the LAN Sub
313. the Internet do not run that software or cancel it if it starts automatically Power Test Internet Port Local Port 4 Figure 3 4 Verify the connections to the firewall Check the status lights and verify the following Power The power light goes on when your turn the wireless firewall print server on Test The test light turns on then goes off after less than a minute Local A Local light on the router is lit If no Local lights are lit check that the Ethernet cable connecting the powered on computer to the router is securely attached at both ends Internet The Internet light on the wireless firewall print server is lit If the Internet light is not lit make sure the Ethernet cable is securely attached to the wireless firewall print server Internet port and the powered on modem 3 6 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 3 LOG INTO THE WRELESS FIREVWALL PRINT SERVER a From your PC launch your Internet browser Because you are not yet connected to the Internet your browser will display a page not found message b Connect to the wireless firewall print server by typing http 192 168 0 1 in the address field of Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator http 192 166 0 1 Figure 3 5 Log in to the firewall c Enter admin for the router user name and password for the router password both
314. the Maintenance heading select Router Status 4 Check that an IP address is shown for the WAN Port If 0 0 0 0 is shown your router has not obtained an IP address from your ISP If your router is unable to obtain an IP address from the ISP you may need to force your broadband modem to recognize your new router by performing the following procedure 1 Turn off power to the broadband modem 2 Turn off power to your router 3 Wait five minutes and reapply power to the broadband modem 4 When the modem s LEDs indicate that it has reacquired sync with the ISP reapply power to your router If your router is still unable to obtain an IP address from the ISP the problem may be one of the following e Your ISP may require a login program Ask your ISP whether they require PPP over Ethernet PPPoE or some other type of login e If your ISP requires a login you may have incorrectly set the login name and password e Your ISP may check for your computer s host name Assign the computer Host Name of your ISP account as the Account Name in the Basic Settings menu e Your ISP only allows one Ethernet MAC address to connect to Internet and may check for your computer s MAC address In this case Inform your ISP that you have bought a new network device and ask them to use the router s MAC address 11 4 Troubleshooting 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG
315. the WAN IP settings in the Basic Setup topics please see Manually Configuring Your Internet Connection on page 3 18 8 20 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 c From the main menu Advanced section click on the LAN IP Setup link LAN IP Setup LAN TCPAP Setup IP Address fio fs Je Jf IP Subnet Mask ass Jass 2ss o RIP Direction None v RIP Version Disabled Use router as DHCP server Starting IP Address 10 5 6 l 2 Ending IP Address lo s JJe l 254 Reserved IP Table IP Address Mac Address Device Name Figure 8 13 LAN IP configuration menu d Configure the LAN IP address according to the settings above and click Apply to save your settings For more information on LAN TCP IP setup topics please see Using the LAN IP Setup Options on page 10 5 Note After you click Apply to change the LAN IP address settings your workstation will be disconnected from the FWG114P v2 You will have to log on with hAttp 10 5 6 1 which is now the address you use to connect to the built in web based configuration manager of the FWG114P v2 Virtual Private Networking 8 21 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 3 Set up the IKE Policy illustrated below on the FWG114P v2
316. to block the use of certain Internet services by computers on your network This is called service blocking or port filtering You can define an outbound rule to block Internet access from a local computer based on e IP address of the local computer source address Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 6 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e IP address of the Internet site being contacted destination address e Time of day e Type of service being requested service port number Outbound Rule Example Blocking Instant Messaging If you want to block Instant Messenger usage by employees during working hours you can create an outbound rule to block that application from any internal IP address to any external address according to the schedule that you have created in the Schedule menu You can also have the router log any attempt to use Instant Messenger during that blocked period Outbound Services Service AIM TCP 5190 ha Action BLOCK by schedule otherwise allow gt LAN users Any wi start Ie f finish T T WAN Users Any gt start J0 f fo b finish f JP l Log Match x Back Cancel Figure 6 7 Rule example Blocking Instant Messenger Other Rules Considerations The order of precedence of rules is determined by the position of the rule on a list of many rules Also there are optional Rules settings you can configure
317. to proceed Print a test page to verify successful printing on your network a Upon completion of the Add Printer Wizard you will be prompted to print a test page b Check the printer attached to the FWG114P v2 to see that the test page printed successfully If you are unable to print a test page see Troubleshooting the Print Server on page 12 7 4 Print Server 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Note If two long files are sent to the printer at once Windows will pop up a print failure error message This message can be ignored The file will print once the printer finishes printing the first file Print Server 7 5 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 For Windows 95 98 Me Use the Netgear Printer Port Driver Follow these instructions to set up the Netgear Printer Port Drive on Windows 9x PCs Install the Netgear Printer Port Driver and configuration utility software Warning If you are installing the Netgear printer port driver on a Windows computer where an Epson printer had been installed you must disable the Epson Spool Manager Failure to disable Epson Spool a Follow the instructions in the printed Manager software will prevent the Netgear Installation Guide or this manual to print
318. to save part of the range for devices with fixed addresses The router will deliver the following parameters to any LAN device that requests DHCP e An IP Address from the range you have defined e Subnet Mask e Gateway IP Address the router s LAN IP address e Primary DNS Server if you entered a Primary DNS address in the Basic Settings menu otherwise the router s LAN IP address e Secondary DNS Server if you entered a Secondary DNS address in the Basic Settings menu Using Address Reservation When you specify a reserved IP address for a computer on the LAN that computer will always receive the same IP address each time it access the router s DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to servers that require permanent IP settings To reserve an IP address 1 Click the Add button 2 Inthe IP Address box type the IP address to assign to the computer or server choose an IP address from the router s LAN subnet such as 192 168 0 X Advanced Configuration 10 7 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 3 Type the MAC Address of the computer or server Tip If the computer is already present on your network you can copy its MAC address from the Attached Devices menu and paste it here 4 Click Apply to enter the reserved address into the table Note The reserved address will not be assigned until the next time the compu
319. tomatically program the four data encryption keys These values must be identical on all PCs and Access Points in your network Authentication Type Normally this can be left at the default value of Automatic If set to Open System or Shared Key wireless stations must use the same method Encryption Select the desired WEP Encryption e 64 bit sometimes called 40 bit encryption e 128 bit encryption Wireless Configuration 4 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 WEP Keys If using WEP you can manually or automatically program the four data encryption keys These values must be identical on all PCs and Access Points in your network e Automatic Key Generation Passphrase Enter a word or group of printable characters this phrase is case sensitive in the Passphrase box and click the Generate Keys button to automatically configure the WEP Key s If encryption is set to 64 bit then each of the four key boxes will automatically be populated with key values If encryption is set to 128 bit then only the selected WEP key box will automatically be populated with a key value e Manual Entry Mode Enter ten hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f or A F These hex values are not case sensitive Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key information for your network in the selected key
320. up of IEEE 802 16 developed a point to multipoint broadband wireless access standard for systems in the frequency range 10 66 GHz The standard covers both the Media Access Control MAC and the physical PHY layers Ratification is expected in second half of 2004 Wireless Multimedia WMM WMM Wireless Multimedia is a subset of the 802 11le standard WMM allows wireless traffic to have a range of priorities depending on the kind of data Time dependent information like video audio or voice will have a higher priority than normal traffic For WMM to function correctly wireless clients must also support WMM Wireless Networking Wireless Networking refers to the infrastructure enabling the transmission of wireless signals A network ties things together and enables resource sharing WLAN Wireless LAN Also referred to as LAN A type of local area network that uses wireless or high frequency radio waves rather than wires to communicate between nodes 14 Glossary 201 10301 02 May 2005
321. usted IP Address lo fo lo jajo Figure 6 1 Block Sites menu To enable filtering click the checkbox next to the type of filtering you want to enable The filtering choices are e Proxy blocks use of a proxy server e Java blocks use of Java applets e ActiveX blocks use of ActiveX components OCX files used by IE on Windows e Cookies blocks all cookies To enable keyword blocking check Turn keyword blocking on then click Apply To add a keyword or domain type it in the Keyword box click Add Keyword then click Apply 6 2 Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 To delete a keyword or domain select it from the list click Delete Keyword then click Apply Keyword application examples e Ifthe keyword XXX is specified the URL lt http www badstuff com xxx html gt is blocked as is the newsgroup alt pictures XXX e Ifthe keyword com is specified only Web sites with other domain suffixes such as edu or gov can be viewed e If you want to block all Internet browsing access enter the keyword Up to 255 entries are supported in the Keyword list To specify a Trusted User enter that computer s IP address in the Trusted User box and click Apply You may specify one Trusted User which is a computer that will be exempt from blocking and logging Since the Trusted
322. uter overwrites the log and discards its contents Be sure to click Apply when you have finished configuring this menu Firewall Protection and Content Filtering 6 15 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Viewing Logs of Web Access or Attempted Web Access The router will log security related events such as denied incoming and outgoing service requests hacker probes and administrator logins If you enable content filtering in the Block Sites menu the Log page will also show you when someone on your network tries to access a blocked site If you enabled e mail notification you will receive these logs in an e mail message If you do not have e mail notification enabled you can view the logs here Logs Date 2004 03 22 18 12 21 Mon 2004 03 22 16 46 08 Attempt to access blocked site A Source 192 168 0 2 LAN Destination bc2 gator com gbsf gd do doubleclick net gtrg2ze WaN Block Mon 2004 03 22 17 07 20 TCP Packet Source 63 240 145 40 80 HTTP WAN Destination 67 122 112 234 2389 LAN Drop TCP preconnect traffic Mon 2004 03 22 17 14 10 Attempt to access blocked site Source 192 168 0 3 LAN Destination ad doubleclick net adj n2885 aimtoday b1279346 5 sz 180x150 c lick http ar atwola com redir b0 sculgzckzzhyxzbOlkwj 4etvi2stqshbxupnpy kajzrvfej_6qikoq ord 66368116216 WAN Block Mon 2004 03 2
323. uthenticated The supplicant in the station uses the authentication and cipher suite information contained in the information elements to decide which authentication method and cipher suite to use For example if the access point is using the pre shared key method then the supplicant need not authenticate using full blown 802 1X Rather the supplicant must simply prove to the access point that it is in possession of the pre shared key If the supplicant detects that the service set does not contain a WPA information element then it knows it must use pre WPA 802 1X authentication and key management in order to access the network e Key management WPA features a robust key generation management system that integrates the authentication and data privacy functions Keys are generated after successful authentication and through a subsequent 4 way handshake between the station and Access Point AP e Data Privacy Encryption Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP is used to wrap WEP in sophisticated cryptographic and security techniques to overcome most of its weaknesses e Data integrity TKIP includes a message integrity code MIC at the end of each plaintext message to ensure messages are not being spoofed Wireless Networking Basics E 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 WPA Authentication Enterprise level User Authentication via 802 1x EAP and RADIUS
324. vate if you want to limit access to the LAN only The static route will not be reported in RIP Type the Destination IP Address of the final destination Type the IP Subnet Mask for this destination If the destination is a single host type 255 255 255 254 Type the Gateway IP Address which must be a router on the same LAN segment as the router Type a number between 1 and 15 as the Metric value This represents the number of routers between your network and the destination Usually a setting of 2 or 3 works but if this is a direct connection set it to 1 Click Apply to have the static route entered into the table As an example of when a static route is needed consider the following case e Your primary Internet access is through a cable modem to an ISP e You have an ISDN router on your home network for connecting to the company where you are employed This router s address on your LAN is 192 168 0 100 Advanced Configuration 10 9 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Your company s network is 134 177 0 0 When you first configured your router two implicit static routes were created A default route was created with your ISP as the gateway and a second static route was created to your local network for all 192 168 0 x addresses With this configuration if you attempt to access a device on the 134 177 0 0 network your router will forw
325. vesnmmmnecntamvennnnanO O Example Port Forwarding to a Local Public Web ee E A E Example Port Forwarding for Videoconferencing s es 6 8 Example Port Forwarding for VPN Tunnels when NAT i is Off PE E EEA 6 8 Outbound Rules Service Blocking or Port Filtering R trad Outbound Rule Example Blocking Instant Messaging cceeeeeeeereee ee 6 10 Other Rules Considerations Order of Precedence for Rules Rules Menu Options TRI See Using a Schedule to Block or Allow Coneita or Traffic Setting the Time Zone 5 PE E EE A Getting E Mail Notifications of Soak laa ind Apis Viewing Logs of Web Access or Attempted Web Access aged PEE MPS eat Indude inthe Event Log essniccsnansinn ipaa Le Chapter 7 Print Server Printing Options aii P E AT T tl For Windows XP and 2000 Use e TCP IP L LPR R Printing E oe For Windows 95 98 Me Use the Netgear Printer Port Driver a A E EE E Pining Tomika PAC THOS i sonnsoaraaniri Ea R erate aan 7 9 Windows Printer Port Management c ccccececeseeeeceeeeeeeeseeseeceaeeeeseaeeeeeseteeteseenee Contents 201 10301 02 May 2005 vii anes 8 Virtual Private Networking Overview of FWG114P v2 Policy Based VPN Configuration ccece eee rene BOT Using Policies to Manage VPN Traffic Fe mer rrr eo rere re re rer reer Using Automatic Key Management ORE 2 IKE Policies Automatic Key and Authentic n fi Management E ET TA VPN Poli
326. ware Configuration File a a PETIIN E PE OL TAEA P PN ATENE IT T Restoring and Backing Up the Configuration Erasmo the COMMUNION zsrsr viii Contents 201 10301 02 May 2005 Changing the Administrator Password serisinin 9 Chapter 10 Advanced Configuration Using the WAN Setup OPONIS aussi sccrsaacessacsidesecccnnesosateededanrbsnaivaoueiantsndaarcedsuuasassecdaacn 10 1 How to Coniigure Dynamic DNS rarnana a VO Using the LAN IP Setup iine na anei OE Configuring LAN TCP IP Setup Parametor AT AT E AAE R A A N 10 5 Using the Router as a DACP server sossssrsisisssnicsuaririnscerrsena TOF Using Address Reservation siissminimsaneinaianinvninenein RIS 10 7 Configuring Static Routes c Pee mer A freer ener reren cr tereere E Enabling Remote Management Aca E E E A E E a a Using Universal Plug and Play UPnP nesses 10 11 Advanced Wireless Settings 10 12 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Basit Function censeri aiai a aies N Power LED Not Ghoti enitaanais LEDs Never Turn Off AEE A E EA E ET LAN or Internet Port LEDs Not tOn as Troubleshooting the Web Sribteuueatiod th Interface sscisiseatunisiocteis Troubleshooting the ISP ConneGiant csisscscacicsccveoviduarnssicanssntecriasminssiatanntestidamtessideann 11 4 Troubleshooting a TCP IP Network Using a Ping Utility cece ee eeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 11 5 Testing the LAN Path to Your ROULCP ciccccscsccissnorssecavasissceasnscesnnorxsanrsess
327. way B in the illustration Out of the box the FVS328 is set for its default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with its default user name of admin and default password of password For this example we will assume you have set the local LAN address as 172 23 9 1 for Gateway B 2 Click IKE Policies link under the VPN category and click Add on the IKE Policies Menu IKE Policy Configuration General Policy Name FYS318 Direction Type Both Directions z Exchange Mode Main Mode z Local Local Identity Type WAN IP Address z Local Identity Data 92 23 24 25 Remote Remote Identity Type Fully Quelitied Domain Name Remote Identity Data netgear dyndns org Figure H 6 NETGEAR FVS328 IKE Policy Configuration Part 1 Enter an appropriate name for the policy in the Policy Name field This name is not supplied to the remote VPN Endpoint It is used to help you manage the IKE policies In our example we have used FVS318 as the Policy Name In the Policy Name field type FVS318 From the Direction Type drop down box select Both Directions From the Exchange Mode drop down box select Main Mode From the Local Identity drop down box select WAN IP Address WAN IP address will automatically be populated into the Local Identity Data field after policy is applied From the Remote Identity drop down box select Fully Qualified Domain Name Type the FQDN netgear dnydns org in our example in the Remote
328. will can check for the following connection types e Dynamic IP assignment e A login protocol such as PPPoE 3 10 Connecting the FWG114P v2 to the Internet 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 e Fixed IP address assignment Next the Setup Wizard will report which connection type it has discovered and then display the appropriate configuration menu If the Setup Wizard finds no connection you will be prompted to check the physical connection between your firewall and the cable or DSL modem When the connection is properly made the firewall s Internet LED should be on The procedures for filling in the configuration menu for each type of connection follow below Wizard Detected Login Account Setup If the Setup Wizard determines that your Internet service account uses a login protocol such as PPP over Ethernet PPPoE you will be directed to a menu like the PPPoE menu in Figure 3 9 PPPoE Account Name Domain Name Login Password Idle Timeout 5 Domain Name Server DNS Address Get automatically from ISP C Use these DNS servers Primary DNS Secondary DNS Apply Cancel Test Figure 3 9 Setup Wizard menu for PPPoE login accounts 1 Enter your Account Name may also be called Host Name and Domain Name These parameters may be necessary to access your ISP s services such as mail or news servers If you leave the Domain Name fie
329. wireless PC Cards printers scanners and multimedia devices Proxy server Used in larger companies and organizations to improve network operations and security a proxy server is able to prevent direct communication between two or more networks The proxy server forwards allowable data requests to remote servers and or responds to data requests directly from stored remote server data Range The distance away from your access point that your wireless network can reach Most Wi Fi systems will provide a range of a hundred feet or more Depending on the environment and the type of antenna used Wi Fi signals can have a range of up to mile Residential gateway A wireless device that connects multiple PCs peripherals and the Internet on a home network Most Wi Fi residential gateways provide DHCP and NAT as well RJ 45 Standard connectors used in Ethernet networks Even though they look very similar to standard RJ 11 telephone connectors RJ 45 connectors can have up to eight wires whereas telephone connectors have only four Roaming Moving seamlessly from one AP coverage area to another with your laptop or desktop with no loss in connectivity Rogue Access Point Rogue AP is a term used to describe an unauthorized access point that is connected on the main home or corporate network or operating in a stand alone mode in a parking lot or in a neighbor s building Rogue APs by definition are not under the management of network administrato
330. wireless computer you will lose your _ gt wireless connection when you click Apply You must then either configure your wireless adapter to match the new wireless settings or access the wireless firewall print server from a wired computer to make any further changes To configure WEP data encryption follow these steps 1 Log in at the default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with the default user name of admin and default password of password or using whatever LAN address and password you set up 4 10 Wireless Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 Click Wireless Settings in the main menu of the FWG114P v2 Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name SSID NETGEAR Region Select Region gt Channel i0 2 457GHz gt Current Channel No 10 2 457GHz Mode E and b Wireless Access Point M Enable Wireless Access Point Allow Broadcast of Name SSID Wireless Station Access List Setup Access List Wireless Security WEP Authentication Open System gt Encryption 64 bitWwEP gt WEP Passphrase O Generate Keys WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 sd WEP Key 3 WEP Key 4 C l Apply Cancel Figure 4 5 Wireless Settings menu WEP 3 Select WEP on the pulldown menu The WEP options menu will open 4 Choose the Authentication Type and Encryption Strength options You can manually or au
331. wn the information 3 Ifan IP address appears under Router address write down the address This is the ISP s gateway address 4 Ifany Name Server addresses are shown write down the addresses These are your ISP s DNS addresses 5 If any information appears in the Search domains information box write it down 6 Change the Configure setting to Using DHCP Server 7 Close the TCP IP Control Panel Preparing Your Network C 11 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Restarting the Network Once you have set up your computers to work with the firewall you must reset the network for the devices to be able to communicate correctly Restart any computer that is connected to the firewall After configuring all of your computers for TCP IP networking and restarting them and connecting them to the local network of your FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server you are ready to access and configure the firewall C 12 Preparing Your Network 201 10301 02 May 2005 Action List Appendix D Firewall Log Formats Drop Reset Forward Receive Field List Packet dropped by Firewall current inbound or outbound rules TCP session reset by Firewall Packet forwarded by Firewall to the next hop based on matching the criteria in the rules table Packet was permitted by the firewall rules and modified prior to being forwarded and or
332. wo VPN endpoints to automatically generate required parameters Some organizations will use an IKE policy with a Certificate Authority CA to perform authentication Typically CA authentication is used in large organizations which maintain their own internal CA server This requires that each VPN gateway has a certificate from the CA Using CAs reduces the amount of data entry required on each VPN endpoint 8 2 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 IKE Policies Automatic Key and Authentication Management Click the IKE Policies link from the VPN section of the main menu and then click the Add button of the IKE Policies screen to display the IKE Policy Configuration menu shown in Figure 8 2 IKE Policies Policy Maco IKE Policy Configuration Name Mode LocalID Remo Add General Policy Name Direction Type Initiator v Exchange Mode Main Mode 7 w Local Local Identity Type WAN IP Address x Local Identity Data Remote Remote Identity Type Remote WAN IP b Remote Identity Data IKE SA Parameters Encryption Algorithm 3DES vi Authentication Algorithm MD5 Authentication Method Pre shared Key RSA Signature requires Certificate Diffie Hellman DH Group Group 1 768 Bi SA Life Time 1180 secs Figure 8 2 IKE Policy Configuration Menu Virtual Privat
333. y Identity ID Type fields as seen in My Identity on page 8 40 From the Encryption Algorithm drop down box select 3DES This will also be selected in the VPN Client Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 Proposal 1 Encrypt Alg field as seen in Connection Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 on page 8 42 From the Authentication Algorithm drop down box select SHA 1 This will also be selected in the VPN Client Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 Proposal 1 Hash Alg field as seen in Connection Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 on page 8 42 From the Authentication Method radio button select Pre shared Key This will also be selected in the VPN Client Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 Proposal 1 Authentication Method field as seen in Connection Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 on page 8 42 In the Pre Shared Key field type hr5xb84l6aa9r6 You must make sure the key is the same for both the client and the FWG114P v2 Wireless Firewall Print Server This will also be selected in the VPN client Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 Proposal 1 Encrypt Alg field as seen in Connection Identity Pre Shared Key on page 8 41 From the Diffie Hellman DH Group drop down box select Group 2 1024 Bit This will also be selected in the VPN Client Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 Proposal 1 Key Group field as seen in Connection Security Policy Authentication Phase 1 on page 8 42 In th
334. y box Secure is selected Inthe Protocol menu All is selected The Connect using Secure Gateway Tunnel check box is selected c In this example select IP Subnet as the ID Type 192 168 0 0 in the Subnet field the Subnet address is the LAN IP Address of the FWG114P v2 with 0 as the last number and 255 255 255 0 in the Mask field which is the LAN Subnet Mask of the FWG114P v2 d Inthe ID Type menus select Domain Name and Gateway IP Address Enter FWG114P v2 in the Domain Name field In this example 66 120 188 153 would be used for the Gateway IP Address which is the static IP address for the FWG114P v2 WAN port 3 Configure the Connection Identity Settings a Inthe Network Security Policy list click the My Identity subheading E My Connections My Identity Si Wae Select Certificate Pre Shared Key G My Identity a Security Policy None x Qs Other Connections ID Type Port Domain Name WPNclient Virtual Adapter Disabled F Internal Network IP Address 0 0 0 0 Figure 8 27 My Identity In this example select Domain Name as the ID Type and enter VPNclient Also accept the default Internal Network IP Address of 0 0 0 0 My Connections My Identity 5 FWG114P 8 G My Identity Select Certificate Pre Shared Key p tity a Security Policy None Qs Other Connections ID Type Port Figure 8 28 My Identity Pre Shared Key 8 40 Virtual Private Networking 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Ma
335. y protection A new frame counter in the IEEE 802 11 frame is used to prevent replay attacks Optional AES Support to be Phased In One of the encryption methods supported by WPA besides TKIP is the advanced encryption standard AES although AES support will not be required initially for Wi Fi certification This is viewed as the optimal choice for security conscience organizations but the problem with AES is that it requires a fundamental redesign of the NIC s hardware in both the station and the access point TKIP is a pragmatic compromise that allows organizations to deploy better security while AES capable equipment is being designed manufactured and incrementally deployed Wireless Networking Basics E 15 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Is WPA Perfect WPA is not without its vulnerabilities Specifically it is susceptible to denial of service DoS attacks If the access point receives two data packets that fail the message integrity code MIC within 60 seconds of each other then the network is under an active attack and as a result the access point employs counter measures which include disassociating each station using the access point This prevents an attacker from gleaning information about the encryption key and alerts administrators but it also causes users to lose network connectivity for 60 seconds More than anything else this may
336. you may need to insert it during the TCP IP installation process Install or Verify Windows Networking Components To install or verify the necessary components for IP networking 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button point to Settings and then click Control Panel 2 Double click the Network icon The Network window opens which displays a list of installed components C 2 Preparing Your Network 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 Network x Configuration Identification Access Control The following network components are installed E Client for Microsoft Networks NETGEAR FA310TX Fast Ethernet PCI Adapter TCP IP Eraperties Primary Network Logon Client for Microsoft Networks Eile and Print Sharing Description You must have an Ethernet adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks Note It is not necessary to remove any other network components shown in the Network window in order to install the adapter TCP IP or Client for Microsoft Networks gt If you need to install a new adapter follow these steps a Click the Add button b Select Adapter and then click Add c Select the manufacturer and model of your Ethernet adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP a Click the Add button b Select Protocol and then click Add c Sele
337. ystem If enabled the following fields must be correct e Radius Accounting Port Enter the port number used for Accounting data on the Radius Server e Update Report Enable this if you wish to have this AP send Accounting update messages to the Radius accounting server periodically If enabled enter the desired Update Report interval in the field provided 5 Click Apply to save your settings How to Configure WPA and WPA2 with Radius Note Not all wireless adapters support WPA and WPA2 Furthermore client software is required on the client Windows XP and Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 do include the client software that supports WPA and WPA2 Nevertheless the wireless adapter hardware and driver must also support WPA and WPA2 Consult the product document for your wireless adapter and WPA and WPA2 client software for instructions on configuring WPA and WPA2 settings To configure WPA and WPA2 with Radius follow these steps 1 Log in at the default LAN address of http 192 168 0 1 with the default user name of admin and default password of password or using whatever LAN address and password you have set up 4 16 Wireless Configuration 201 10301 02 May 2005 Reference Manual for the ProSafe Wireless 802 119 Firewall Print Server Model FWG114P v2 2 Click Wireless Settings in the main menu of the FWG114P v2 ireless Settings Wireless Network NETGEAR Select Region 7 10 2 457GHz 7 Current Channel N

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Support Services Program For End Users  RUBBERLIGHT LED RL4-mit controller, 9m User Manual  T112001 GPS Travel Honey  Metro 80XT Metro 80XT Tunnel  Oublierait-on ressentie! ?  PCI-1735U User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file